JP6234025B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and in particular, variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each, and when a display result becomes a specific display result, a specific gaming state advantageous to the player is achieved. It relates to a gaming machine to be controlled.

  As what is generally known as this type of gaming machine, for example, a plurality of types of identification information (symbols) that can be identified, such as pachinko gaming machines, are variably displayed (variable display, also referred to as variation). When the display result becomes the specific display result (big hit display result), there is a control that controls to a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player.

  In addition, a jackpot symbol “7” is displayed on the left and right for the reach effect performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit is continued before the display result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state). When reaching the reach state, the fluctuation speed when the big hit symbol “7” passes through the center position that is still variably displayed is controlled to be slower than the fluctuation speed when the other symbols pass. (Patent Document 1).

JP-A-5-96049 (paragraphs 0004 to 0005)

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, although the expectation can be expected when the jackpot symbol (reach symbol) passes, the expectation cannot be expected when other symbols pass, which may attract the attention of the player. could not.

  Therefore, the present invention provides an amusing gaming machine capable of attracting the player's attention when non-reach identification information other than the identification information forming the reach state is variably displayed in the reach state. With the goal.

(1) A plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be distinguished from each other are variably displayed (variable display, also referred to as variability). A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that controls to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state),
Predetermining means for determining whether or not the display result is the specific display result before the display result is derived and displayed (the part for executing S300 in the game control microcomputer 560);
Fluctuating display control means (production control microcomputer 100, S7005 in FIG. 58) for deriving and displaying a display result according to the determination of the prior determination means,
Production means for variably displaying non-reach identification information (for example, symbol other than “7” symbol, “6” symbol, etc.) other than identification information (for example, “7” symbol) forming the reach state in the reach state ( Production control microcomputer 100) ,
On-hold storage means capable of storing information on variable display as on-hold storage information;
A notice effect execution means for executing continuous notice effects over a variable display of the identification information a plurality of times before the change display based on the hold storage information stored in the hold storage means is executed ,
The effect means can execute an effect in which the non-reach identification information changes,
Expectation (e.g., big hit expectation) Ri aspects Do different of the non reach identification information depending on,
The notice effect executing means executes a pattern for executing the first notice effect and a second notice effect having a higher ratio of the specific display result than the first notice effect in the variable display of the identification information for a plurality of times. The notice effect can be executed in any one of a pattern and a pattern in which the second notice effect is executed after the first notice effect is executed,
There are a plurality of production modes of the first notice production,
In the case where the effect mode of the first notice effect is the first effect mode, the first notice effect is performed after the first notice effect is performed, compared to the case where the first effect effect is higher than the first effect mode. The ratio that the notice effect is executed by the pattern that executes the second notice effect is high.

According to such a configuration, when the non-reach identification information other than the identification information that forms the reach state is displayed in the reach state in a variably displayed manner, the non-reach identification information is different depending on the expectation. When the identification information is variably displayed, the player's attention can be drawn.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1),
A game control microcomputer for controlling the progress of the game (for example, a game control microcomputer 560);
Whether a first reset (eg, system reset) is generated based on occurrence of a predetermined event (eg, input of an IAT signal from the IAT circuit 506a, input of a timeout signal from the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b) Setting means capable of setting whether to generate two resets (for example, user reset) (for example, step S1001 according to the set value of bit 7 of the reset setting (KRES) shown in FIG. 12 of the program management area in the game control microcomputer 560) , Part for executing S1011)
A security check is performed after the occurrence of the first reset, but a security check is not performed after the occurrence of the second reset (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 is configured as shown in FIG. After step S1004, the security check is executed in step S1006, and as shown in FIG. 46B, the security check is not executed after step S1014).
The game control microcomputer is:
Storage means (for example, RAM 55 (backup RAM)) capable of holding information generated when performing control related to a game for a predetermined period even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped;
Predetermined processing execution means (for example, a part for executing steps S16 to S19 and S20 to S34 in the game control microcomputer 560) capable of executing the predetermined processing (for example, loop processing in the main processing, timer interrupt processing) ,
Initializing means for initializing the storage contents of the storage means when a predetermined event occurs during execution of the predetermined processing (for example, in steps S16 to S19 and S20 to S34 in the game control microcomputer 560) When the IAT signal from the IAT circuit 506a or the time-out signal from the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b is input to the main process after resetting without executing the power-off process shown in FIGS. Includes a portion for executing steps S10 to S13.

  According to such a configuration, security related to the game control microcomputer can be improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2),
The game control microcomputer includes a watchdog timer (for example, a watchdog timer (WDT) 506b),
The occurrence of the predetermined event includes a timeout of the watchdog timer (for example, input of a timeout signal from the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b),
The setting means can set whether to activate the watchdog timer (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 sets bits 3-0 of the reset setting (KRES) shown in FIG. 12 of the program management area. This is a case where the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b can be set to be prohibited by executing steps S1001 and S1011 according to the setting value being “0000”, and the watchdog timer is set not to be activated. However, it is possible to set whether to generate the first reset or the second reset based on the occurrence of the predetermined event (for example, FIG. 12 of the program management area in the game control microcomputer 560). Bits 3-0 of the reset setting (KRES) shown in Even if it is set to 000 ", by executing the steps S1001, S1011 according to the setting value of bit 7 and can set the type of reset).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to share the setting of the type of reset that is generated based on the occurrence of a predetermined event regardless of the setting of the watchdog timer.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) or (3),
The occurrence of the predetermined event includes execution outside the designated area (for example, prohibition of running outside the designated area (IAT)) for executing a program stored in an area other than the designated area (for example, from the IAT circuit 506a). IAT signal input),
During the execution of a timer interrupt process (for example, the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 49) executed in response to a timer interrupt that occurs every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms) as the predetermined process. When the execution outside the designated area occurs, the storage contents of the storage means are initialized (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 receives the IAT signal from the IAT circuit 506a during the execution of steps S20 to S34). (Sometimes, steps S10 to S13 are executed when the main process is started after resetting without executing the power-off process shown in FIGS. 50 and 51).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve security when an unintended program is executed.

(5) In any one of the gaming machines (2) to (4),
When the setting means is set to generate the first reset, after the predetermined event has occurred and the first reset has been generated, the first reset is performed based on the occurrence of the predetermined event. Set again whether to generate the second reset or not (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes step S1005 when a system reset occurs, as shown in FIG. 46A). The various settings of the game control microcomputer 560 are executed again by hardware, so that the system reset or the user reset is set again).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to reliably recover from an abnormal state to a normal state.

(6) In the gaming machine of any one of (1) to (5),
A sound generator (sound output board 70, speaker 27) for generating sound effects;
When the non-reach identification information other than the identification information forming the reach state is variably displayed in the reach state, the effect means increases the number of the non-reach identification information as the predetermined effect mode (FIG. 76). A sound effect is generated by the sound generator together with (D) and (E).

  According to such a configuration, when non-reach identification information other than the identification information forming the reach state is variably displayed in the reach state, the number of non-reach identification information is increased and a sound effect is generated by the sound generator. Since it can be generated, the interest of the game is improved.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the microcomputer for game control. It is a figure which shows an example of the address map in the microcomputer for game control. It is a figure which illustrates the main part of a program management area. It is a figure which illustrates the principal part of a built-in register. It is a figure which illustrates the principal part of a built-in register. It is a figure which illustrates the principal part of a built-in register. It is a figure which illustrates the correspondence of the setting data and operation | movement in a header (KHDR). It is a figure which shows an example of the setting content in a program code end address (KPCE), a program code start address 2 (KPCS2), and a program code end address 2 (KPCE2). It is a figure which shows an example of the setting content in reset setting (KRES). It is a figure which shows an example of the setting content in 16 bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1). It is a figure which shows an example of the setting content in 16 bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2). It is a figure which shows an example of the setting content in 16 bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3). It is a figure which shows an example of the setting content in 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1). It is a figure which shows an example of the setting content in 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2). It is a figure which shows an example of the setting content in security time setting (KSES). It is a figure which shows an example of the setting content in random number clock monitoring setting (KRCS). It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an internal information register. It is a block diagram which shows the example of 1 structure of an 8-bit random number circuit. It is a block diagram which shows one structural example of a 16-bit random number circuit. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure example and setting content of RL0 hard latch selection register 0 (RL0LS0). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure example and setting content of RL0 hard latch selection register 1 (RL0LS1). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure of a RLn hard latch selection register (RLnLS), and an example of a setting content. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure example and setting content of RS hard latch selection register 0 (RSLS0). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure example and setting content of RS hard latch selection register 1 (RSLS1). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure of RL interruption control register 0 (RLIC0), and an example of the setting content. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure example and setting content of RL interrupt control register 1 (RLIC1). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure of a RS interruption control register (RSIC), and an example of setting content. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure of a RLn maximum value setting register (RLnMX), and an example of the setting content. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure example of RSn maximum value setting register (RSnMX), and a setting content. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure example and setting content of a random number sequence change register (RDSC). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure example and setting content of a random number soft latch register (RDSL). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure of a random number soft latch flag register (RDSF), and an example of the setting content. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure of a RLn soft latch random number value register (RLnSV), and an example of setting content. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure example of RSn soft latch random number value register (RSnSV), and a setting content. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure of RL hard latch flag register 0 (RLHF0), and an example of the setting content. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure example and setting content of RL hard latch flag register 1 (RLHF1). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure example and setting content of RS hard latch flag register (RSHF). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure of a RL0 hard latch random number value register m (RL0mHV), and an example of setting content. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure of a RL1 hard latch random number value register m (RL1mHV), and an example of setting content. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure of a RL2 hard latch random number value register m (RL2mHV), and an example of setting content. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure of a RL3 hard latch random number value register m (RL3mHV), and an example of the setting content. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure example of RSn hard latch random number value register (RSnHV), and a setting content. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the difference in the reset operation by the setting content by reset setting (KRES). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of how to read the data stored in the internal RAM area. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 4 ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a power-off process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a power-off process. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit type determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prefetch notice determination process. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the ratio which determines a prefetch notice effect. It is a figure which shows the list of chance eyes for continuous productions. It is a figure which shows the list of prefetch notice effect control patterns. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the ratio which determines the notice effect during a fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prefetch notice execution setting process. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus in case a prefetch notice effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus in case a prefetch notice effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus in case a prefetch notice effect is performed. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch notice pattern in a modification. It is a figure which shows a part of prefetch notice determination process of a modification, etc. It is a figure which shows a part of prefetch notice effect control pattern of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus in case a prefetch notice effect is performed in a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus in case a prefetch notice effect is performed in a modification. It is a figure which shows an example of a pattern sending effect. It is a figure which shows a symbol sending effect selection table.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the variable display unit (the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol is based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning port (the first starting winning port 13 or the second starting winning port 14). A specific gaming state advantageous to the player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display (variable display) of special symbols (identification information) started on the display unit 8b) A “big hit” is generated. Derived display is to stop the display of symbols (excluding stop before so-called re-variation). When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening (special variable winning ball apparatus 20) is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state in which a hit ball is easy to win. Then, in each open period of the special winning opening (special variable winning ball apparatus 20), if there is a predetermined (for example, 10) large winning opening (special variable winning ball apparatus 20), the big winning opening (special variable) The winning ball apparatus 20) is closed. The number of times the special winning opening (special variable winning ball apparatus 20) is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the large winning opening (special variable winning ball apparatus 20) is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each large winning opening (special variable winning ball apparatus 20) may be referred to as a round.

  Further, “expectation”, which will be described later, is a concept including an expectation for jackpot, an expectation for probability change, and the like. Specifically, the degree of expectation (also referred to as reliability) for the big hit is an expectation degree (a ratio to be a big hit) when each reach fluctuation pattern is selected. For example, reach fluctuation is performed 100 times. If the number of hits is 60 times, the degree of expectation for the big hit is 60% (the appearance rate (probability) that the big hit appears is 60%). In addition, the degree of expectation for probability variation refers to the degree of expectation (proportion of probability variation) that shifts to the probability variation state. In the effect display device 9, predetermined content (content that can be used in an environment other than a game such as image content, music content, and coupon information, a special display effect that can be executed in a game, and a special audio effect that can be executed in a game) 2D code corresponding to the content that can be used in games, etc.), the player reads the 2D code with a portable terminal device such as a mobile phone, and accesses the predetermined privilege server to obtain the content corresponding data. The degree of expectation that a predetermined privilege can be obtained by receiving may be an “expectation”.

  First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The display screen of the effect display device 9 has an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of effect symbols (hereinafter also referred to as decorative symbols) synchronized with variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. The effect symbol display area includes a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) have continued for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stops, swings, scales, or deforms in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols fluctuate synchronously in the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol is switched Thus, an effect performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) before the final result is displayed is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes “out” and the variation display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  Note that, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which the effect symbol display is performed as a liquid crystal display effect in the effect display device 9, but the effect performed in the effect display device 9 is the one shown in this embodiment. For example, an effect having a predetermined story characteristic may be executed, and an effect may be executed in which the result of the story is displayed based on the determination result of the jackpot determination or the variation pattern. For example, perform a battle effect where professional wrestling or soccer matches and enemy characters fight, perform an effect to win the game or battle if it is a big hit, and perform an effect to defeat the game or battle if it is off Also good. Further, for example, instead of displaying the result such as winning or losing, an effect may be executed in which a predetermined story such as a story is developed in order.

  In the upper right part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d for displaying a fourth symbol after the effect symbol, a special symbol described later, and a normal symbol. In this embodiment, a fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol described later, There is provided a fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (however, to be precise, the variation display of the effect symbol is varied on the effect control microcomputer 100 side). This is done by measuring the variation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing an effect using the effect display device 9, for example, the effect content including the change display of the effect symbol disappears from the screen for a moment. There are a variety of effects such as effects being performed and effects in which movable objects shield all or part of the screen. For this reason, even if the display screen on the effect display device 9 is viewed, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the current variation display is in progress. Therefore, in this embodiment, whether or not the state of the present variation is being displayed by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further displaying the variation of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. It is possible to recognize whether or not. Note that the 4th symbol is always variably displayed with a constant operation and does not disappear from the screen or is not shielded by a shielding object, so that it can always be visually recognized.

  The 4th symbol for the first special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 9c for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol The 4th symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a 4th symbol display area.

  The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state where the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are repeatedly turned on and off at a predetermined time interval in a predetermined display color (for example, blue). . The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 8a is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. Synchronous means that the variable display start time and end time are the same, and the variable display period is the same. When the big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the fourth special symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol is kept lit in a display color (for example, red) reminiscent of the big hit. . When the big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the fourth special symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol is kept lit in a display color reminiscent of the big hit (for example, red).

  In this embodiment, the case where the 4th symbol display area is provided on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown, but a light emitter such as a lamp or LED is used separately from the effect display device 9. Thus, the fourth symbol display area may be realized. In this case, for example, the variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which the two LEDs are alternately lit, and any of the two LEDs is stopped. Whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed may be indicated depending on whether or not it is displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which separate fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are provided corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, but the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbols may be provided in a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Moreover, you may make it implement | achieve the 4th symbol display area common with respect to a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol using light-emitting bodies, such as a lamp | ramp and LED. In this case, when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, For example, the display of different display colors at certain time intervals may be performed by distinguishing and executing the variation display of the fourth symbol by performing display that repeatedly turns on and off. In addition, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, The display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing a display that repeatedly turns on and off at different time intervals. In addition, for example, when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, the same big hit symbol is obtained. However, you may make it stop-display the stop symbol of a different aspect.

  On the left side of the lower part of the game board 6, a first special symbol display (first variable display portion) 8a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. On the lower right side of the game board 6, a second special symbol display (second variable display portion) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of, for example, 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  Although this embodiment shows a case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening) 14 after passing (including winning)), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) The state is started and the big hit game is not executed), and when the variable display time (fluctuation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be won at the second start winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly under the effect display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The nail arrangement around the first start winning opening 13 is made difficult to guide the game balls to the first starting winning opening 13 so that the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is increased. It is also possible to make the direction higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  On the side of the first special symbol display 8a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the start memory or the start prize memory) is displayed. A first special symbol storage memory display 18a comprising four displays is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  On the side of the second special symbol display 8b, a second special symbol hold memory display 18b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Also, at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided a first reserved memory display unit 18c for displaying the first reserved memory number and a second reserved memory display unit 18d for displaying the second reserved memory number. ing. In addition, you may make it provide the area | region (sum total pending | holding memory display part) which displays the total number (sum total pending memory count) which is the sum total of the 1st pending memory count and the 2nd pending memory count. As described above, if the summation pending storage display section for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that are not satisfied with the variable display start condition.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. A variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the jackpot The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the game control microcomputer 560 that controls the change display of the special symbol transmits a change pattern command that can specify the change time, and the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the change pattern command. The variation display of the effect symbol is controlled according to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command. Therefore, since the variation time is specified based on the variation pattern command, the variation display of the special symbol and the variation display of the effect symbol should be executed in synchronization in principle. However, in the unlikely event that the data of the variation pattern command is garbled, the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side There may be a gap between them. For this reason, when an unexpected situation such as garbled command data occurs, there is a possibility that the special symbol variation display and the production symbol variation display are not completely synchronized.

  On the left side of the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, a movable member 78 that is attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 86 and moves when the motor 86 rotates is provided. In this embodiment, the movable member 78 operates when a pseudo-series effect or a notice effect (movable object notice effect) is executed. Further, in the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, a blade-shaped movable member (hereinafter referred to as an effect blade accessory) that is attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 87 and moves when the motor 87 rotates is provided below the left and right. 79a and 79b are provided. In this embodiment, the production blade actors 79a and 79b operate when a notice production (production blade production notice production) is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  The game area 6 is also provided with winning ports (ordinary winning ports) 29, 30, 33, 39 for paying out a predetermined number of premium game balls determined in advance based on winning of the game balls. The game balls won in the winning openings 29, 30, 33, 39 are detected by the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided on the right side of the game board 6. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on). For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. . When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. In addition, a probability variation state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is high (a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit as a result of fluctuation display of special symbols is increased compared to the normal state). Then, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased. Even in the short state (the game state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened) when the symbol variation time is shortened although it is not the probability variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

  On the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there are provided decorative LEDs 25 that are displayed blinking during the game, and at the lower part there is an outlet 26 for taking in a hit ball that has not won. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  The members constituting the hitting ball supply tray 3 are provided with operation buttons 120 as operation means that can be operated by the player. The operation button 120 is provided with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player. The operation button 120 is provided not only with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player, but also with a dial that can be rotated by the player. The player can perform a predetermined selection (for example, selection of effects) by rotating the dial.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when a probable big hit is made, the game state is shifted to a high probability state, and the game ball is likely to start and win (that is, in the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9). It shifts to a high base state, which is a gaming state controlled so that a variable display execution condition is easily established. In addition, when the gaming state is shifted to the short time state, the state is shifted to the high base state. In the high base state, for example, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is increased or the time in which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is extended compared to the case in which the high base state is not in the high base state. It becomes easier to win a start.

  Instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display unit 10 shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display unit 10 will be a hit symbol is increased. Depending on the situation, the high base state may be entered. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by performing the transition control to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and a state where it is easy to start a winning (high base state) is achieved. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 can be increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time short state where the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is hit increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state).

  In addition, the change time of special symbols and production symbols will be shortened by shifting to the short time state when the variation time (variable display period) of special symbols and production symbols is shortened. The frequency of being played (in other words, the digestion of the reserved memory becomes faster), and the situation where an invalid start prize is generated can be reduced. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of a big hit game being increased.

  Furthermore, by shifting to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it becomes easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). Transition to a state). In addition, it is easier to win a start by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). You may make it move to a base state.

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 2 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. On the main board 31, a game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program, a control clock generation circuit 111, and a random number clock generation circuit 112 are mounted. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as a storage means used as a work memory, and a CPU 56 for performing a control operation in accordance with the program. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes random number circuits 508a and 508b that generate hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  Here, the control clock generation circuit 111 generates a control clock CCLK that becomes an oscillation signal of a predetermined frequency outside the game control microcomputer 560. The control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 111 is supplied to the clock circuit 502 via a control external clock terminal of a game control microcomputer 560 as shown in FIG. The random number clock generation circuit 112 generates a random number clock RCLK that is an oscillation signal having a predetermined frequency different from the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK, outside the game control microcomputer 560. The random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 112 is, for example, random number circuits 508a and 508b via a random number external clock terminal (RCK terminal) of a game control microcomputer 560 as shown in FIG. To be supplied. As an example, the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 112 may be equal to or lower than the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 111. Alternatively, the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 112 may be higher than the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 111.

  In this embodiment, the case where the dedicated random number clock RCLK is input from the random number clock generation circuit 112 to the random number circuits 508a and 508b is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, instead of using a dedicated clock, the control clock CCLK from the control clock generation circuit 111 may be input to the random number circuits 508a and 508b inside the game control microcomputer 560. In this case, for example, a random number counter (random number generation circuits 525a and 525b to be described later) built in the random number circuits 508a and 508b may be updated using a signal obtained by dividing the control clock CCLK. In this case, the random number clock generation circuit 112 may not be provided on the main board 31.

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on a power supply board (not shown). That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data (a special symbol process flag or the like) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31. However, as will be described later, when the gaming machine is turned on or when a system reset occurs, the gaming control microcomputer 560 sets the internal reset operation and the random number circuits 508a and 508b according to the setting contents of the program management area. The register is set, and the setting operation is performed by the game control microcomputer 560 by hardware without using a program.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 13a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. Yes. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b that variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  Between the main board 31 and the effect control board 80, for example, by performing serial communication only in a single direction from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77, various effect control commands are sent. Is transmitted. In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. An effect control command is received, and display control of the effect display device 9 for variably displaying effect symbols is performed.

  In addition, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board and the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35. The sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled via the sound output board 70.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives an effect control command via the relay board 77. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols (including effect symbols), and background image data in advance. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control CPU 101 drives the motor 86 to operate the movable member 78 via the output port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 drives a motor 87 for operating the effect blades 79 a and 79 b via the output port 106.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs a signal from the operation button 120 via the input port 107 in response to a pressing operation of the operation button 120 by the player.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED. Further, an electric current is supplied to the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output form of the sound effect or sound in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  FIG. 4 shows a configuration example of the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG. 4 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes an external bus interface 501, a clock circuit 502, a verification block 503, a specific information storage circuit 504, an arithmetic circuit 505, and a reset. / Interrupt controller 506, CPU (Central Processing Unit) 56, ROM (Read Only Memory) 54, RAM (Random Access Memory) 55, free-run counter circuit 507, random number circuits 508a and 508b, timer circuit 509 An interrupt controller 510, a parallel input port 511, a serial communication circuit 512, a parallel output port 513, and an address decoding circuit 514.

  The random number circuits installed in the game control microcomputer 560 include an 8-bit random number circuit 508a that generates an 8-bit random number and a 16-bit random number circuit 508b that generates a 16-bit random number. In the example shown in FIG. 4, an 8-bit random number circuit 508a and a 16-bit random number circuit 508b for generating a 16-bit random number are illustrated one by one. However, the game control microcomputer 560 includes an 8-bit random number circuit. 508a and 16-bit random number circuit 508b for generating 16-bit random numbers are mounted on each of four circuits (four channels). In this embodiment, the four channels of the 8-bit random number circuit 508a may be expressed as RS0 to RS3, respectively, and the four channels of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b may be expressed as RL0 to RL3, respectively.

  The reset / interrupt controller 506 also includes an out-of-designated area prohibition (IAT) circuit 506a and a watchdog timer (WDT) 506b. The IAT circuit 506a is a circuit that monitors whether the user program is correctly executed in the designated area, and has a function of outputting an IAT generation signal when it is detected that the user program is executed outside the designated area. The watchdog timer 506b has a function of generating a time-out signal for each set period.

  FIG. 5 shows an example of an address map in the game control microcomputer 560. As shown in FIG. 5, the area from address 0000H to address 2FFFH is allocated to the ROM 54 of the game control microcomputer 560 and includes a program code / data area (an area for storing user programs and data) and a program management area. It is out. FIG. 6 shows an example of the usage and contents of the main part of the program management area in the ROM 54. The area from address F000H to address F3FFH is allocated to the RAM 55 of the game control microcomputer 560. The area from address FE00H to address FEBFH is a built-in register area allocated to the built-in registers of the game control microcomputer 560. 7 to 9 show examples of uses and contents of the main part of the built-in register area. The area from the address FED0H to the address FEFDH is an XCS / XCSE decode area allocated to the address decode circuit 514.

  The program management area is a storage area for storing information necessary for the game control microcomputer 560 to perform various settings such as internal reset operation settings and random number circuits 508a and 508b when the system is reset. As shown in FIG. 6, the program management area includes a header (KHDR), a program code end address (KPCE), a program code start address 2 (KPCS2), a program code end address 2 (KPCE2), a reset setting (KRES), 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1), 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2), 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3), 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1), 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2), Security time setting (KSES), random number clock monitoring setting (KRCS), and the like are included. As shown in FIGS. 7 to 9, the built-in register area includes an internal information register (CIF) and various registers used in the random number circuits 508a and 508b.

  The header (KHDR) stored in the program management area indicates the setting of an 8-byte code string indicating the start of the program management area and the reading setting of internal data in the game control microcomputer 560. FIG. 10 illustrates the correspondence between the setting data and the operation in the header (KHDR). Here, in the game control microcomputer 560, a ROM read prevention function and a bus output mask function can be set. The ROM read prevention function is a function for permitting or prohibiting the read operation of the data stored in the ROM 54 provided in the game control microcomputer 560. When the read prohibition is set, the data stored in the ROM 54 cannot be read. The bus output mask function is an address bus output, data bus output and control signal in the external bus interface 501 when an external device connected to the external bus interface 501 makes a read request for the internal data of the game control microcomputer 560. This function makes it impossible to read internal data from an external device by masking the output. As shown in FIG. 10, in accordance with the setting data set as an 8-byte code string indicating the start of the program management area, the operation combinations of the ROM read prevention function and the bus output mask function are set to be different. Of the setting data shown in FIG. 10, the setting data for which ROM reading is permitted and the bus output mask is valid is also referred to as bus output mask valid data. Further, the setting data (all “00H”) in which ROM reading is prohibited and the bus output mask is valid is also referred to as ROM reading prohibiting data. The setting data for which ROM reading is permitted and the bus output mask becomes invalid is also referred to as bus output mask invalid data.

  The program code end address (KPCE) stored in the program management area indicates the setting of the final address of the program code area that continues from 0000H of the user program. FIG. 11A shows an example of setting contents in the program code end address (KPCE).

  In this embodiment, two program code areas can be set in the program code / data area from address 0000H to address 2FBFH. Specifically, the first program code area can be set as an area from address 0000H to the address set by the program code end address (KPCE), and the second program code area is the program code start It can be set as an area from the address set by address 2 (KPCS2) to the address set by program code end address 2 (KPCE2). Hereinafter, the program code stored in the first program code area is also referred to as program code 1, and the program code stored in the second program code area is also referred to as program code 2.

  As shown in FIG. 11A, the lower address of the final address of the program code 1 is set in the address 2FD3H of the program code end address (KPCE). In addition, the upper address of the final address of the program code 1 is set in the address 2FD4H.

  Program code start address 2 (KPCS2) stored in the program management area indicates the setting of the start address of the second program code area when the user program is divided into two blocks. FIG. 11B shows an example of setting contents at the program code start address 2 (KPCS2).

  As shown in FIG. 11B, the lower address of the head address of the program code 2 is set in the address 2FD5H of the program code start address 2 (KPCS2). In addition, the upper address of the head address of the program code 2 is set in the address 2FD6H. If the program code area is not divided into two, 0000H may be set to address 2FD5H and address 2FD6H of program code start address 2 (KPCS2).

  The program code end address 2 (KPCE2) stored in the program management area indicates the setting of the final address of the second program code area when the user program is divided into two blocks. FIG. 11C shows an example of setting contents in the program code end address 2 (KPCE2).

  As shown in FIG. 11C, the lower address of the final address of the program code 2 is set in the address 2FD7H of the program code end address 2 (KPCE2). In addition, the upper address of the final address of the program code 2 is set in the address 2FD8H. If the program code area is not divided into two, 0000H may be set for address 2FD7H and address 2FD8H of program code end address 2 (KPCE2).

  The setting contents of the program code end address (KPCE), program code start address 2 (KPCS2) and program code end address 2 (KPCE2) shown in FIG. 11 are executed correctly in the designated area by the IAT circuit 506a. Referenced when monitoring whether or not. That is, the IAT circuit 506a designates from 0000H to the address indicated by the program code end address (KPCE) or from the address indicated by the program code start address 2 (KPCS2) to the address indicated by the program code end address 2 (KPCE2). It is determined whether or not the user program is being executed within the range, and an IAT signal is output based on the detection that the user program is being executed outside the specified range.

  The reset setting (KRES) stored in the program management area indicates an internal reset operation or operation permission / prohibition setting of the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b. FIG. 12 shows an example of setting contents in the reset setting (KRES).

  Bit [7] of reset setting (KRES) is reset internally when a time-out signal is input from watchdog timer (WDT) 506b or when an IAT occurs (when an IAT signal is input from IAT circuit 506a) It shows the setting of the operation when this occurs. In the example shown in FIG. 12, if the bit value in the reset setting (KRES) bit [7] is “0”, a user reset occurs when a timeout signal or an IAT signal is input. On the other hand, if the bit value in the reset setting (KRES) bit [7] is “1”, a system reset occurs when a time-out signal or an IAT signal is input.

  Bit [6] of the reset setting (KRES) indicates the setting of the activation method of the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b. In the example shown in FIG. 12, if the bit value of the reset setting (KRES) bit [6] is “0”, the watch automatically switches to the user mode when a reset occurs regardless of the user program. The dog timer (WDT) 506b is activated and time measurement is started. On the other hand, if the bit value in bit [6] of the reset setting (KRES) is “1”, the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b is activated by the software (user program) after the transition to the user mode. Measurement starts.

  Bit [5-4] of the reset setting (KRES) indicates the setting of the reference clock signal of the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b. In the example illustrated in FIG. 12, when “00” is set in the bit [5-4] of the reset setting (KRES), 215 × TSCLK is selected as the reference clock signal. Further, when “01” is set in the reset setting (KRES) bit [5-4], 219 × TSCLK is selected as the reference clock signal. When “10” is set in the reset setting (KRES) bit [5-4], 222 × TSCLK is selected as the reference clock signal. When “11” is set in the reset setting (KRES) bit [5-4], 225 × TSCLK is selected as the reference clock signal. SCLK represents the internal system clock of the game control microcomputer 560, and TSCLK represents 1 / SCLK.

  Bits [3-0] of the reset setting (KRES) indicate the setting of the timeout time of the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b. Specifically, the time-out period of the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b is set to the reference clock selected by the bit [5-4] of the reset setting (KRES) using the bits [3-0] of the reset setting (KRES). It is a value obtained by multiplying the set value. For example, when “1000” is set to the bit [3-0] of the reset setting (KRES) (that is, the value “8” is set), “00” is set to the bit [5-4] of the reset setting (KRES). When set, the timeout time is 215 × TSCLK × 8. When the reset setting (KRES) bit [5-4] is set to “01”, the timeout time is 219 × TSCLK × 8 and reset. If bit [5-4] of setting (KRES) is set to “10”, the timeout time is 222 × TSCLK × 8, and bit [5-4] of reset setting (KRES) is set to “11”. In this case, the timeout time is 225 × TSCLK × 8. In addition, when “1111” is set to the bit [3-0] of the reset setting (KRES) (that is, the value “15” is set), “00” is set to the bit [5-4] of the reset setting (KRES). When set, the timeout time is 215 × TSCLK × 15. When the reset setting (KRES) bit [5-4] is set to “01”, the timeout time is 219 × TSCLK × 15, which is reset. When bit [5-4] of setting (KRES) is set to “10”, the timeout time is 222 × TSCLK × 15, and bit [5-4] of reset setting (KRES) is set to “11”. In this case, the timeout time is 225 × TSCLK × 15. FIG. 12 also shows specific examples of time-out time values when the internal system clock is 10.0 MHz and 12.0 MHz.

  When setting not to use the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b, as shown in FIG. 12, it is only necessary to set “0000” in bits [3-0] of the reset setting (KRES). However, even if the reset setting (KRES) bit [3-0] is set to “0000” and the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b is disabled, the reset setting (KRES) bit By setting the value of [7], it is possible to set whether to perform system reset or user reset.

  16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1), 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2), and 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) stored in the program management area indicate settings of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b. FIG. 13 shows an example of setting contents in 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1). FIG. 14 shows an example of setting contents in 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2). Further, FIG. 15 shows an example of setting contents in 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3).

  First, the setting contents in 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) will be described with reference to FIG. Bit “7” of 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) indicates the setting of the activation method of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 1 out of the 4-bit 16-bit random number circuit 508b. In the example shown in FIG. 13, if the bit value in the bit “7” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) is “0”, the maximum random number is set by software (user program) after shifting to the user mode. As a result, the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 1 is activated. On the other hand, if the bit value in the bit “7” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) is “1”, regardless of the user program, it is automatically based on the transition to the user mode when a reset occurs. Then, the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 1 is activated.

  Bit “6” of 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) indicates the setting of the update clock of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 1. In the example shown in FIG. 13, if the bit value of the bit “6” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) is “0”, the internal system clock of the game control microcomputer 560 is used as the update clock. On the other hand, if the bit value in the bit “6” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) is “1”, the external clock signal input from the outside of the game control microcomputer 560 is divided by two. The signal is used as an update clock.

  In this embodiment, the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 112 described above is input via the random number external clock terminal (RCK terminal), and the random number clock RCLK is divided by two. This signal is used as an update clock. The same applies to the 16-bit random number circuit 508b and the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of other channels.

  Bit “5-4” of 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) indicates whether to change the random number sequence updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 1. In the example shown in FIG. 13, if the bit value in the bit “5-4” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) is “00”, the random number sequence updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of the channel 1 is not changed. . Further, if the bit value in the bit “5-4” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) is “01”, the random number sequence updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of the channel 1 is changed by software (user program). it can. If the bit value in the bit “5-4” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) is “10”, the random number sequence updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of the channel 1 is automatically started from the second round. After that, the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence is completed. If the bit value in the bit “5-4” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) is “11”, the random number sequence updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of the channel 1 is automatically set from the first round. After that, the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence is completed.

  Bit “3” of 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) indicates the setting of the activation method of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 0 among the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of 4 channels. In the example shown in FIG. 13, if the bit value in the bit “3” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) is “0”, the maximum random number is set by software (user program) after shifting to the user mode. Is activated, the channel 0 16-bit random number circuit 508b is activated. On the other hand, if the bit value in the bit “3” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) is “1”, it is automatically based on the transition to the user mode when a reset occurs regardless of the user program. Then, the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 0 is activated.

  Bit “2” of 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) indicates the setting of the update clock of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 0. In the example shown in FIG. 13, if the bit value in the bit “2” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) is “0”, the internal system clock of the game control microcomputer 560 is used as the update clock. On the other hand, if the bit value in the bit “2” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) is “1”, the external clock signal input from the outside of the game control microcomputer 560 is divided by two. The signal is used as an update clock.

  Bits “1-0” of 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) indicate whether to change the random number sequence updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 0. In the example shown in FIG. 13, if the bit value of bits “1-0” of 16-bit random number initialization 1 (KRL1) is “00”, the random number sequence updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 0 is not changed. . Further, if the bit value in the bit “1-0” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) is “01”, the random number sequence updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of the channel 0 is changed by software (user program). it can. If the bit value in the bit “1-0” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) is “10”, the random number sequence updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of the channel 0 is automatically started from the second round. After that, the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence is completed. If the bit value in the bit “1-0” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) is “11”, the random number sequence updated by the channel 0 16-bit random number circuit 508b is automatically generated from the first round. After that, the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence is completed.

  Next, setting contents in 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2) will be described with reference to FIG. Bit “7” of 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2) indicates the setting of the activation method of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 3 out of the 4-bit 16-bit random number circuit 508b. In the example shown in FIG. 14, if the bit value in the bit “7” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2) is “0”, the maximum random number is set by software (user program) after shifting to the user mode. Is activated, the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 3 is activated. On the other hand, if the bit value in bit “7” of 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2) is “1”, it is automatically based on the transition to the user mode when a reset occurs regardless of the user program. Then, the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 3 is activated.

  Bit “6” of 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2) indicates the setting of the update clock of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 3. In the example shown in FIG. 14, if the bit value of bit “6” of 16-bit random number initialization 2 (KRL2) is “0”, the internal system clock of the game control microcomputer 560 is used as the update clock. On the other hand, if the bit value in the bit “6” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2) is “1”, the external clock signal input from the outside of the game control microcomputer 560 is divided by two. The signal is used as an update clock.

  Bit “5-4” of 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2) indicates whether or not the random number sequence updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 3 is changed. In the example illustrated in FIG. 14, if the bit value in the bit “5-4” of the 16-bit random number initialization 2 (KRL2) is “00”, the random number sequence updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of the channel 3 is not changed. . If the bit value in the bit “5-4” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2) is “01”, the random number sequence updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of the channel 3 is changed by software (user program). it can. If the bit value in the bit “5-4” of the 16-bit random number initialization 2 (KRL2) is “10”, the random number sequence updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of the channel 3 is automatically started from the second round. After that, the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence is completed. If the bit value in the bit “5-4” of the 16-bit random number initialization 2 (KRL2) is “11”, the random number sequence updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of the channel 3 is automatically set from the first round. After that, the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence is completed.

  Bit “3” of 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2) indicates the setting of the activation method of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 2 out of the 4-bit 16-bit random number circuit 508b. In the example shown in FIG. 14, if the bit value in the bit “3” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2) is “0”, the maximum random number is set by software (user program) after shifting to the user mode. Is activated, the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 2 is activated. On the other hand, if the bit value in the bit “3” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2) is “1”, it is automatically based on the transition to the user mode when a reset occurs regardless of the user program. Then, the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 2 is activated.

  Bit “2” of 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2) indicates the setting of the update clock of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 2. In the example shown in FIG. 14, if the bit value of bit “2” of 16-bit random number initialization 2 (KRL2) is “0”, the internal system clock of the game control microcomputer 560 is used as the update clock. On the other hand, if the bit value in the bit “2” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2) is “1”, the external clock signal input from the outside of the game control microcomputer 560 is divided by two. The signal is used as an update clock.

  Bits “1-0” of 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2) indicate whether to change the random number sequence updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 2. In the example shown in FIG. 14, if the bit value in the bit “1-0” of 16-bit random number initialization 2 (KRL2) is “00”, the random number sequence updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 2 is not changed. . Also, if the bit value in bit “1-0” of 16-bit random number initialization 2 (KRL2) is “01”, the random number sequence updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 2 is changed by software (user program). it can. If the bit value in the bit “1-0” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2) is “10”, the random number sequence updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of the channel 2 is automatically started from the second round. After that, the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence is completed. If the bit value in bit “1-0” of 16-bit random number initialization 2 (KRL2) is “11”, the random number sequence updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 2 is automatically updated from the first round. After that, the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence is completed.

  Next, setting contents in 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) will be described with reference to FIG. Bit “7” of 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) indicates the setting of the start value from the first round of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 3 out of the 4-bit 16-bit random number circuit 508b. In the example shown in FIG. 15, if the bit value in the bit “7” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) is “0”, 0001H is used as the start value of the first round of random number update. On the other hand, if the bit value in the bit “7” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) is “1”, the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 is used as the start value of the first round of random number update. The original value is used. Since the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 is different for each chip, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the update timing of the random number by using a value based on the ID number as the start value. It is possible to prevent an act of illegally generating a big hit aiming at. Note that the ID number itself may be used as a value based on the ID number, or a predetermined calculation (for example, a value obtained by adding or subtracting a predetermined value) may be used for the ID number.

  Bit “6” of 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) indicates whether or not the start value of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 3 is changed at every system reset. In the example shown in FIG. 15, if the bit value in bit “6” of 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) is “0”, the start value is not changed at the time of system reset. On the other hand, if the bit value in bit “6” of 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) is “1”, the start value is changed at every system reset.

  Bit “5” of 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) indicates the setting of the start value from the first round of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 2 out of the 4-bit 16-bit random number circuit 508b. In the example shown in FIG. 15, if the bit value in the bit “5” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) is “0”, 0001H is used as the start value for the first round of random number update. On the other hand, if the bit value in bit “5” of 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) is “1”, the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 is used as the start value of the first round of random number update. The original value is used.

  Bit “4” of 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) indicates whether or not the start value of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 2 is changed at every system reset. In the example shown in FIG. 15, if the bit value in bit “4” of 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) is “0”, the start value is not changed at the time of system reset. On the other hand, if the bit value in bit “6” of 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) is “1”, the start value is changed at every system reset.

  Bit “3” of 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) indicates the setting of the start value from the first round of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 1 out of the 4-bit 16-bit random number circuit 508b. In the example shown in FIG. 15, if the bit value at bit “3” of 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) is “0”, 0001H is used as the start value for the first round of random number update. On the other hand, if the bit value in the bit “3” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) is “1”, the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 is used as the start value of the first round of random number update. The original value is used.

  Bit “2” of 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) indicates whether or not the start value of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 1 is changed at every system reset. In the example shown in FIG. 15, if the bit value in bit “2” of 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) is “0”, the start value is not changed at the time of system reset. On the other hand, if the bit value in the bit “2” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) is “1”, the start value is changed at every system reset.

  Bit “1” of 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) indicates the setting of the start value from the first round of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 0 out of the 4-bit 16-bit random number circuit 508b. In the example shown in FIG. 15, if the bit value at bit “1” of 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) is “0”, 0001H is used as the start value for the first round of random number update. On the other hand, if the bit value in the bit “1” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) is “1”, the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 is used as the start value of the first round of random number update. The original value is used.

  Bit “0” of 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) indicates whether or not the start value of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 0 is changed at every system reset. In the example shown in FIG. 15, if the bit value at bit “0” of 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) is “0”, the start value is not changed at the time of system reset. On the other hand, if the bit value at bit “0” of 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) is “1”, the start value is changed at every system reset.

  The 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) and the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) stored in the program management area indicate settings of the 8-bit random number circuit 508a. FIG. 16 shows an example of setting contents in 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1). FIG. 17 shows an example of setting contents in the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2).

  First, the setting contents in 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) will be described with reference to FIG. Bit “7” of 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) indicates the setting of the activation method of the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of channel 1 out of the 4-bit 8-bit random number circuit 508a. In the example shown in FIG. 16, if the bit value in the bit “7” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) is “0”, the maximum value of the random number is set by software (user program) after shifting to the user mode. As a result, the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of channel 1 is activated. On the other hand, if the bit value in the bit “7” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) is “1”, regardless of the user program, it is automatically based on the transition to the user mode when a reset occurs. Then, the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of channel 1 is activated.

  Bit “6” of 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) indicates the setting of the update clock of the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of channel 1. In the example shown in FIG. 16, if the bit value of bit “6” of 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) is “0”, the internal system clock of the game control microcomputer 560 is used as the update clock. On the other hand, if the bit value in the bit “6” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) is “1”, the external clock signal input from the outside of the game control microcomputer 560 is divided by two. The signal is used as an update clock.

  Bit “5-4” of 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) indicates whether to change the random number sequence updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of channel 1. In the example shown in FIG. 16, if the bit value in the bit “5-4” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) is “00”, the random number sequence updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of the channel 1 is not changed. . If the bit value in the bit “5-4” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) is “01”, the random number sequence updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of the channel 1 is changed by software (user program). it can. If the bit value in the bit “5-4” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) is “10”, the random number sequence updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of the channel 1 is automatically started from the second round. After that, the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence is completed. If the bit value in the bit “5-4” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) is “11”, the random number sequence updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of the channel 1 is automatically started from the first round. After that, the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence is completed.

  Bit “3” of 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) indicates the setting of the activation method of the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of channel 0 out of the 4-channel 8-bit random number circuit 508a. In the example shown in FIG. 16, if the bit value in the bit “3” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) is “0”, the maximum value of the random number is set by software (user program) after shifting to the user mode. As a result, the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of channel 0 is activated. On the other hand, if the bit value in the bit “3” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) is “1”, it is automatically based on the transition to the user mode when a reset occurs regardless of the user program. Then, the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of channel 0 is activated.

  Bit “2” of 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) indicates the setting of the update clock of the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of channel 0. In the example shown in FIG. 16, if the bit value in the bit “2” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) is “0”, the internal system clock of the game control microcomputer 560 is used as the update clock. On the other hand, if the bit value in the bit “2” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) is “1”, the external clock signal input from the outside of the game control microcomputer 560 is divided by two. The signal is used as an update clock.

  Bits “1-0” of 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) indicate whether to change the random number sequence updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of channel 0. In the example shown in FIG. 16, if the bit value in the bit “1-0” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) is “00”, the random number sequence updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of channel 0 is not changed. . If the bit value in the bit “1-0” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) is “01”, the random number sequence updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of channel 0 is changed by software (user program). it can. If the bit value in the bit “1-0” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) is “10”, the random number sequence updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of the channel 0 is automatically started from the second round. After that, the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence is completed. If the bit value in the bit “1-0” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) is “11”, the random number sequence updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of channel 0 is automatically started from the first round. After that, the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence is completed.

  Next, setting contents in 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) will be described with reference to FIG. Bit “7” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) indicates the setting of the activation method of the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of channel 3 out of the 4-bit 8-bit random number circuit 508a. In the example shown in FIG. 17, if the bit value in the bit “7” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) is “0”, the maximum value of the random number is set by software (user program) after shifting to the user mode. Is activated, the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of channel 3 is activated. On the other hand, if the bit value in bit “7” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) is “1”, it is automatically based on the transition to the user mode when a reset occurs regardless of the user program. Then, the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of channel 3 is activated.

  Bit “6” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) indicates the setting of the update clock of the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of the channel 3. In the example shown in FIG. 17, if the bit value of the bit “6” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) is “0”, the internal system clock of the game control microcomputer 560 is used as the update clock. On the other hand, if the bit value in the bit “6” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) is “1”, the external clock signal input from the outside of the game control microcomputer 560 is divided by two. The signal is used as an update clock.

  Bit “5-4” of 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) indicates whether to change the random number sequence updated by 8-bit random number circuit 508a of channel 3. In the example shown in FIG. 17, if the bit value in the bit “5-4” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) is “00”, the random number sequence updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of the channel 3 is not changed. . If the bit value in the bit “5-4” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) is “01”, the random number sequence updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of the channel 3 is changed by software (user program). it can. If the bit value in the bit “5-4” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) is “10”, the random number sequence updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of the channel 3 is automatically updated from the second round. After that, the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence is completed. If the bit value in the bit “5-4” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) is “11”, the random number sequence updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of the channel 3 is automatically updated from the first round. After that, the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence is completed.

  Bit “3” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) indicates the setting of the activation method of the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of channel 2 out of the 4-bit 8-bit random number circuit 508a. In the example shown in FIG. 17, if the bit value in the bit “3” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) is “0”, the maximum value of the random number is set by software (user program) after shifting to the user mode. Is activated, the channel 2 8-bit random number circuit 508a is activated. On the other hand, if the bit value in bit “3” of 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) is “1”, it is automatically based on the transition to the user mode when a reset occurs regardless of the user program. Then, the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of channel 2 is activated.

  Bit “2” of 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) indicates the setting of the update clock of the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of channel 2. In the example shown in FIG. 17, if the bit value in bit “2” of 8-bit random number initialization 2 (KRS2) is “0”, the internal system clock of the game control microcomputer 560 is used as the update clock. On the other hand, if the bit value in the bit “2” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) is “1”, the external clock signal input from the outside of the game control microcomputer 560 is divided by two. The signal is used as an update clock.

  Bits “1-0” of 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) indicate whether to change the random number sequence updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of channel 2. In the example shown in FIG. 17, if the bit value in the bit “1-0” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) is “00”, the random number sequence updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of the channel 2 is not changed. . If the bit value in the bit “1-0” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) is “01”, the random number sequence updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of the channel 2 is changed by software (user program). it can. If the bit value in the bit “1-0” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) is “10”, the random number sequence updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of channel 2 is automatically updated from the second round. After that, the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence is completed. If the bit value in the bit “1-0” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) is “11”, the random number sequence updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of channel 2 is automatically updated from the first round. After that, the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence is completed.

  Note that the 8-bit random number circuit 508a is different from the 16-bit random number circuit 508b in that it does not have a function for setting a start value as shown in FIG.

  The security time setting (KSES) stored in the program management area indicates a time setting for extending the security mode. FIG. 18 shows an example of setting contents in the security time setting (KSES).

  Bit [7-6] of the security time setting (KSES) indicates the setting of the time for extending the security mode time at random. In the example shown in FIG. 18, when “01” is set in the bit [7-6] of the security time setting (KSES), the short mode is set as a mode for randomly extending the security mode time. Specifically, when the internal system clock is 10.0 MHz, the time in the range of 0 to 0.816 ms is randomly extended, and when the internal system clock is 12.0 MHz, the range of 0 to 0.51 ms. The time is extended randomly. In addition, when “10” is set in the bit [7-6] of the security time setting (KSES), the middle mode is set as a mode for randomly extending the security mode time. When the system clock is 10.0 MHz, the time in the range of 0 to 26.112 ms is randomly extended, and when the internal system clock is 12.0 MHz, the time in the range of 0 to 16.32 ms is randomly selected. Extended. Further, when “11” is set in the bit [7-6] of the security time setting (KSES), the long mode is set as a mode for randomly extending the security mode time. When the system clock is 10.0 MHz, the time in the range of 0 to 855.584 ms is randomly extended, and when the internal system clock is 12.0 MHz, the time in the range of 0 to 522.24 ms is randomly selected. Extended.

  When setting so as not to perform random extension of the security mode time, as shown in FIG. 18, it is only necessary to set “00” in bits [7-6] of the security time setting (KSES).

  Bit [5] of the security time setting (KSES) indicates the setting of the reference clock signal for the time for fixing and extending the security mode time. In the example shown in FIG. 18, when “0” is set in bit [5] of the security time setting (KSES), 222 × TSCLK is selected as the reference clock signal. When “1” is set in bit [5] of the security time setting (KSES), 224 × TSCLK is selected as the reference clock signal.

  Bits [4-0] of the security time setting (KSES) indicate a time setting for extending the security mode time in a fixed manner. Specifically, the fixed extension time of the security mode time is the set value set by the bit [4-0] of the security time setting (KSES) to the reference clock selected by the bit [5] of the security time setting (KSES). Is the value multiplied by. For example, when “00001” is set to the bit [4-0] of the security time setting (KSES) (that is, the value “1” is set), “0” is set to the bit [5] of the security time setting (KSES). When set, the fixed extension time is 222 × TSCLK × 1, and when “1” is set to bit [5] of the security time setting (KSES), the fixed extension time is 224 × TSCLK × 1. . Also, when “01000” is set in the bit [4-0] of the security time setting (KSES) (that is, the value “8” is set), “0” is set in the bit [5] of the security time setting (KSES). When set, the fixed extension time is 222 × TSCLK × 8, and when “1” is set to bit [5] of the security time setting (KSES), the fixed extension time is 224 × TSCLK × 8. . Also, when “10000” is set to the bit [4-0] of the security time setting (KSES) (that is, the value “16” is set), “0” is set to the bit [5] of the security time setting (KSES). When set, the fixed extension time is 222 × TSCLK × 16, and when “1” is set to bit [5] of the security time setting (KSES), the fixed extension time is 224 × TSCLK × 16. . Further, when “11111” is set to the bit [4-0] of the security time setting (KSES) (that is, the value “31” is set), “0” is set to the bit [5] of the security time setting (KSES). When set, the fixed extension time is 222 × TSCLK × 31, and when “1” is set to bit [5] of the security time setting (KSES), the fixed extension time is 224 × TSCLK × 31. . FIG. 18 also shows specific examples of fixed extension time values when the internal system clock is 10.0 MHz and 12.0 MHz.

  When setting so that the security mode time is not fixedly extended, “00000” may be set in bits [4-0] of the security time setting (KSES) as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the security mode time is randomly extended by setting the security time setting (KSES) bit [7-6] and fixedly extended by setting the security time setting (KSES) bit [5-0]. The extension can be set in two ways. And the addition time of the time set by these two types of methods becomes the extension time of the final security mode time.

  The random number clock monitoring setting (KRCS) stored in the program management area indicates the setting of the monitoring frequency of the external clock signal input from the random number external clock terminal (RCK terminal). FIG. 19 shows an example of setting contents in the random number clock monitoring setting (KRCS).

  Bit [7-2] of the random number clock monitoring setting (KRCS) is a fixed bit (that is, a bit that is not particularly used for setting), and all bits are always set to “0”.

  Bits [1-0] of the random number clock monitoring setting (KRCS) are input clocks when an external clock signal input from the random number external clock terminal (RCK terminal) is selected as a clock for updating the random number. The setting of the frequency used as the detection target of frequency anomalies is shown. In the example shown in FIG. 19, when “00” is set in bits [1-0] of the random number clock monitoring setting (KRCS), the monitoring frequency is set to less than the frequency of SCLK (internal system clock). When “01” is set in bits [1-0] of the random number clock monitoring setting (KRCS), the monitoring frequency is set to less than the frequency of SCLK (internal system clock) / 2. When “10” is set in bits [1-0] of the random number clock monitoring setting (KRCS), the monitoring frequency is set to less than the frequency of SCLK (internal system clock) / 22. When “11” is set in bits [1-0] of the random number clock monitoring setting (KRCS), the monitoring frequency is set to a frequency less than the frequency of SCLK (internal system clock) / 23.

  When an abnormality in the monitoring frequency of the external clock signal input from the random number external clock terminal (RCK terminal) is detected, “1” is set in bit 3 of the internal information register (CIF) described later.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 detects an abnormal operation (external clock frequency abnormality and update abnormality) of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b out of the 8-bit random number circuit 508a and the 16-bit random number circuit 508b. It has a function to do. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the random number clock monitoring setting (KRCS) when the external clock signal input from the random number external clock terminal (RCK terminal) is selected as the random number update clock. Based on the set monitoring frequency, it is detected whether or not the frequency of the external clock signal has decreased, and when a decrease in the frequency of the external clock signal (external clock frequency error) is detected, an internal information register described later Set "1" to bit 3 of (CIF).

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of monitoring the update state of the random number of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b, and when an abnormality is detected in the update state (for example, the random number value is not updated with the same value, If the random number is counted up one by one and the random number is suddenly detected to have increased by 2 or more), the correspondence among bits 7 to 4 of the internal information register (CIF) Set “1” to the bit to be used.

  In this embodiment, the setting of the monitoring frequency of the external clock signal to be monitored is performed with respect to the detection of abnormal operation of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b by setting using the random number clock monitoring setting (KRCS). Although illustrated, it may be configured to be able to set whether or not to detect external clock frequency abnormality itself, or to be able to set whether or not to detect update abnormality itself. In this case, it may be configured such that the setting of whether or not the external clock frequency abnormality detection itself is performed and the setting of whether or not the update abnormality detection itself is performed can be performed independently. May be configured to enable or disable all of them at once.

  In order to be able to set whether or not to detect external clock frequency abnormality itself or whether or not to detect update abnormality itself, for example, whether to start the random number circuit itself is set. If the random number circuit is set not to start, the external clock frequency abnormality detection and update abnormality detection cannot be performed effectively, so the external clock frequency abnormality detection and update abnormality detection are not performed. It can be said that. As described above, setting whether or not to detect the external clock frequency abnormality itself or whether or not to detect the update abnormality itself includes realizing whether or not to start the random number circuit itself. It is a concept.

  In this embodiment, a case where the dedicated random number clock RCLK is externally input to the random number circuits 508 a and 508 b from the random number clock generation circuit 112 is shown. For example, for control from the control clock generation circuit 111 Even when a clock other than the dedicated random number clock RCLK is externally input, such as when the clock CCLK is externally input, it is possible to detect an external clock frequency abnormality or update abnormality. Regarding detection of update abnormality of the random number circuit, other clocks such as a random number update using the dedicated random number clock RCLK from the random number clock generation circuit 112 and a control clock CCLK from the control clock generation circuit 111 are used. It may be configured so that it can be set only in either of the cases of random number updating by using.

  In this embodiment, the abnormality of the external clock frequency is detected, and the abnormality of the frequency of the internal system clock SCLK of the game control microcomputer 560 is not particularly detected. This is because of the following reason. . That is, when the internal system clock SCLK is used for updating the random number, the operation of the CPU 56 itself should have stopped in a situation where an abnormality has occurred in the internal system clock SCLK. However, there is no case where only the update of the random number is stopped, and there is no possibility that some problem will occur. On the other hand, when an external clock signal is used for the random number update, there is a possibility that only the update of the random number is stopped even though the CPU 56 is operating, which may cause an adverse effect. It is.

  The external bus interface 501 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG. 4 includes an interface function between the external bus and the internal bus of the chip constituting the game control microcomputer 560, an address bus, a data bus, and each control signal. A bus interface having a direction control function and the like. For example, the external bus interface 501 is connected to an external memory or an external input / output device externally attached to the game control microcomputer 560, and an address signal, a data signal, various control signals, etc. are connected to these external devices. As long as it transmits and receives.

  The clock circuit 502 included in the game control microcomputer 560 is a circuit that generates the internal system clock SCLK by, for example, dividing the oscillation signal input to the control external clock terminal EX by two. The generated internal system clock is output from the external output terminal (CLKO terminal) to the outside.

  The verification block 503 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 is connected to an external verification machine and has a function of performing chip verification.

  The unique information storage circuit 504 included in the game control microcomputer 560 is a circuit that stores a plurality of types of unique information that is internal information of the game control microcomputer 560, for example. As an example, the unique information storage circuit 504 stores three kinds of unique information such as a ROM code, a chip individual number, and an ID number. The ROM 54 code is a 4-byte numerical value generated from stored data in a predetermined area of the ROM 54, and four numerical values with different generation methods may be prepared. The chip individual number is a 4-byte number assigned when the game control microcomputer 560 is manufactured, and indicates a different value for each chip constituting the game control microcomputer 560. The ID number is an 8-byte number assigned when the game control microcomputer 560 is manufactured, and shows a different numerical value for each chip constituting the game control microcomputer 560. Here, the chip individual number may be read from the user program, while the ID number may be set so as not to be read from the user program. The unique information storage circuit 504 may be included in the ROM 54 by using a predetermined area of the ROM 54, for example. Alternatively, the unique information storage circuit 504 may be included in the CPU 56 by using, for example, a built-in register of the CPU 56.

  An arithmetic circuit 505 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 is a circuit that performs multiplication and division.

  The reset / interrupt controller 506 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 is for controlling various reset and interrupt requests generated inside or outside the game control microcomputer 560. The reset controlled by the reset / interrupt controller 506 includes a system reset and a user reset. The system reset is a reset that occurs when a low level signal is input to the external system reset terminal XSRST for a certain period. In this embodiment, the system reset is also performed when a watchdog timer (WDT) time-out signal is generated due to the reset setting (KRES) setting or when travel outside the designated area is prohibited (IAT). May occur. The user reset is a reset that occurs due to a predetermined factor, such as a watchdog timer (WDT) time-out signal or a non-designated area travel prohibition (IAT).

  Interrupts controlled by the reset / interrupt controller 506 include a non-maskable interrupt NMI and a maskable interrupt INT. The non-maskable interrupt NMI is an interrupt that is unconditionally accepted even when the CPU 56 is in an interrupt disabled state, and is an interrupt that is generated when a low level signal is input to the external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI (also used as the input port PI6) for a certain period. is there. The maskable interrupt INT is an interrupt that can permit / prohibit acceptance of an interrupt request by a setting instruction of the CPU 56, and multiple interrupts can be executed by setting priority. The cause of the maskable interrupt INT is that a low level signal is input to the external maskable interrupt terminal XINT (also used as the input port PI5) for a certain period, a time-out occurs in the timer circuit 509, the serial communication circuit 512 Multiple types of interrupt factors may be determined in advance, such as the occurrence of an interrupt factor due to data reception or data transmission, or the occurrence of an interrupt factor due to the acquisition of numeric data that is a random value in the random number circuits 508a and 508b. That's fine.

  The reset / interrupt controller 506 uses the internal information register CIF (address FE25H) among the built-in registers of the game control microcomputer 560 as shown in FIGS. 7 to 9 to control interrupts and manage resets. Do. The internal information register CIF is a register for managing a reset factor generated immediately before, reading a random number update state, and a state of an input frequency when the random number update clock is an external clock.

  FIG. 20A shows a configuration example of the internal information register CIF. FIG. 20B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of the internal information data stored in the internal information register CIF. The internal information data RL3ER stored in the bit number [7] of the internal information register CIF indicates an abnormality in the update state of the 16-bit random number RL3 updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of the channel 3. In the example shown in FIG. 20B, when the update abnormality of the 16-bit random number RL3 is not detected, the bit value of the internal information data RL3ER becomes “0”, whereas when the update abnormality of the 16-bit random number RL3 is detected. The bit value is “1”. The internal information data RL2ER stored in the bit number [6] of the internal information register CIF indicates an abnormality in the update state of the 16-bit random number RL2 updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of the channel 2. In the example shown in FIG. 20B, when no update abnormality of the 16-bit random number RL2 is detected, the bit value of the internal information data RL2ER becomes “0”, whereas when an update abnormality of the 16-bit random number RL2 is detected. The bit value is “1”. The internal information data RL1ER stored in the bit number [5] of the internal information register CIF indicates an abnormality in the update state of the 16-bit random number RL1 updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of the channel 1. In the example shown in FIG. 20B, when the update abnormality of the 16-bit random number RL1 is not detected, the bit value of the internal information data RL1ER becomes “0”, while when the update abnormality of the 16-bit random number RL1 is detected. The bit value is “1”. The internal information data RL0ER stored in the bit number [4] of the internal information register CIF indicates an abnormality in the update state of the 16-bit random number RL0 updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of the channel 0. In the example shown in FIG. 20B, when the update abnormality of the 16-bit random number RL0 is not detected, the bit value of the internal information data RL0ER becomes “0”, while when the update abnormality of the 16-bit random number RL0 is detected. The bit value is “1”. The bit number [7-4] of the internal information register CIF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The internal information data RCER stored in the bit number [3] of the internal information register CIF is obtained when the external clock signal input from the random number external clock terminal (RCK terminal) is selected as the random number update clock. Indicates a frequency error in the external clock signal. In the example shown in FIG. 20B, when the frequency abnormality of the external clock signal is not detected, the bit value of the internal information data RCER becomes “0”, while when the frequency abnormality of the external clock signal is detected, The bit value is “1”. The bit number [3] of the internal information register CIF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The internal information data SRSF stored in the bit number [2] of the internal information register CIF indicates that the reset factor generated immediately before is a system reset. In the example shown in FIG. 20B, when the reset factor immediately before is not a system reset (system reset has not occurred), the bit value of the internal information data SRSF is “0”, whereas when the system reset is in effect (system When the reset occurs), the bit value becomes “1”. The bit number [2] of the internal information register CIF is set to “1” as an initial value.

  The internal information data WDTF stored in the bit number [1] of the internal information register CIF indicates that the reset factor generated immediately before is a user reset by inputting a timeout signal from the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b. In the example shown in FIG. 20B, when the reset factor immediately before is not a user reset by the timeout signal (user reset by the timeout signal has not occurred), the bit value of the internal information data WDTF becomes “0”, while the timeout occurs. When it is a user reset by a signal (a user reset is generated by a timeout signal), the bit value becomes “1”. The bit number [1] of the internal information register CIF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  Internal information data IATF stored in bit number [0] of internal information register CIF indicates that the reset factor generated immediately before is a user reset due to the input of an IAT generation signal from IAT circuit 506a. In the example shown in FIG. 20B, when the immediately preceding reset factor is not a user reset by the IAT generation signal (user reset has not occurred by the IAT generation signal), the bit value of the internal information data IATF becomes “0”. When the user reset is performed by the IAT generation signal (user reset is generated by the IAT generation signal), the bit value is “1”. The bit number [0] of the internal information register CIF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The CPU 56 included in the game control microcomputer 560 executes a user program (game control processing program for game control) based on the control code read from the ROM 54, thereby executing a game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1. CPU. When such game control is executed, the CPU 56 reads the fixed data from the ROM 54, the variable data writing operation in which the CPU 56 writes various data to the RAM 55 and temporarily stores the data, and the CPU 56 is temporarily stored in the RAM 55. A variable data read operation for reading various variable data being received, and a reception operation in which the CPU 56 receives input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 560 via the external bus interface 501, the parallel input port 511, the serial communication circuit 512, and the like. The CPU 56 also performs a transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 560 via the external bus interface 501, the serial communication circuit 512, the parallel output port 513, and the like.

  The ROM 54 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 stores a control code indicating a user program (game control processing program for game control), fixed data, and the like.

  The RAM 55 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 provides a work area for game control. Here, at least a part of the RAM 55 may be a backup RAM that is backed up by a backup power source created on a power supply board (not shown). That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, at least a part of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period.

  The game control microcomputer 560 is equipped with four channels of 8-bit free-run counters as the free-run counter circuit 507.

  The random number circuits 508a and 508b included in the game control microcomputer 560 are circuits that generate numerical data that is a random value having a predetermined update range, such as an 8-bit random number or a 16-bit random number. In this embodiment, the hardware random number generated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b among the random number circuits 508a and 508b is used as a big hit determination random number (random R) for determining whether or not to make a big hit. The CPU 56 is used for games by processing or updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuits 508a and 508b based on the numerical data extracted from the random number circuits 508a and 508b. Numerical data indicating all or part of the random number value may be counted. Alternatively, the CPU 56 may count (update) a part of numerical data indicating a random value such as a big hit determination random number by software without using the random number circuits 508a and 508b. As an example, the numerical data extracted by the CPU 56 from the random number circuits 508a and 508b serving as hardware is processed by software to update the numerical data indicating the big hit determination random number (random R), and other random values The numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random number, the variation pattern type determination random number, or the variation pattern determination random number may be updated by software by the CPU 56 using a random counter or the like.

  FIG. 21 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the 8-bit random number circuit 508a. FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b. As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the 8-bit random number circuit 508a and the 16-bit random number circuit 508b include random number sequence change selection circuits 523a and 523b, random number generation circuits 525a and 525b, random number sequence change circuits 526a and 526b, and maximum values. Comparing circuits 527a and 527b are provided. In addition to the components included in the 8-bit random number circuit 508a, the 16-bit random number circuit 508b includes a random number start value selection circuit 535, as shown in FIG. Further, as shown in FIG. 22, the 16-bit random number circuit 508b includes an update monitoring circuit 537 in addition to the components included in the 8-bit random number circuit 508a.

  In the example shown in FIG. 22, only the configuration of the circuit portion of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b is shown, and description of each register used by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b other than the random number sequence change register 522 and the maximum value setting register 524b is omitted. doing. Specifically, the 16-bit random number circuit 508b replaces the RS hard latch selection registers 528a and 528b shown in FIG. 21 with the RL0 hard latch selection register 0 (RL0LS0) to the RL3 hard latch selection register (RL3LS) shown in FIG. ), Instead of the RS0 hard latch random value register 529a to RS3 hard latch random value register 529d shown in FIG. 21, the RL0 hard latch random value register 0 (RL0HV0) to RL3 hard latch random value register shown in FIGS. 21 (RL3HV1) is used, and instead of the RS hard latch flag register 530 shown in FIG. 21, RL hard latch flag register 0 (RLHF0) to RL hard latch flag register 1 (RLHF1) shown in FIG. RS interrupt control register 53 7 is used instead of the RS0 soft latch random value register 533a to RS3 soft latch random value register 533d shown in FIG. 21, using the RL interrupt control register 0 (RLIC0) to the RL interrupt control register 1 (RLIC1) shown in FIG. RL0 soft latch random value register (RL0SV) to RL3 soft latch random value register (RL3SV) shown in FIG. The 16-bit random number circuit 508b uses the same register as the 8-bit random number circuit 508a for the random value soft latch register 532 and the random number soft latch flag register 534.

  The 8-bit random number circuit 508a is an 8-bit random number initial setting 521a (8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) and 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) shown in FIG. 6) provided in the program management area described above. Operates according to the set contents.

  The 16-bit random number circuit 508b is a 16-bit random number initial setting 521b (16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) to 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2) shown in FIG. 6) provided in the program management area already described. Operates according to the set contents. In addition to the function of the 8-bit random number circuit 508a, the 16-bit random number circuit 508b sets the 16-bit random number initial setting 536 (16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) shown in FIG. 6). By operating according to the contents, it has a function of changing the start value of the random number value in the first round (see FIG. 15).

  In the 16-bit random number circuit 508b, the random number generation circuit 525b includes an update monitoring circuit 537. In addition to the function of the 8-bit random number circuit 508a, the update monitoring circuit 537 operates to cause an external clock frequency abnormality and an update abnormality. (See FIG. 19). In this embodiment, the case where both the external clock frequency abnormality and the update abnormality are detected by one update monitoring circuit 537 is shown. However, the monitoring circuit for detecting the external clock frequency abnormality and the monitoring for detecting the update abnormality are shown. A circuit may be provided separately.

  Note that the 8-bit random number circuit 508a may also be configured to include an update monitoring circuit so that an external clock frequency abnormality and an update abnormality of the 8-bit random number circuit 508a can be detected.

  The random number sequence change register 522 corresponds to the random number sequence change register RDSC included in the built-in register of the game control microcomputer 560 as shown in FIG. As the random number sequence change register RDSC, a common register is used in each channel of the 8-bit random number circuit 508a and the 16-bit random number circuit 508b.

  The maximum value setting registers 524a and 524b correspond to the RS0 maximum value setting register (RS0MX) to the RS3 maximum value setting register (RS3MX) included in the built-in registers of the game control microcomputer 560 as shown in FIG. (In the case of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b, it corresponds to the RL0 maximum value setting register (RL0MX) to the RL3 maximum value setting register (RL3MX)).

  The hard latch selection register 528a corresponds to the RS hard latch selection register 0 (RSLS0) included in the built-in register of the game control microcomputer 560 as shown in FIG. The hard latch selection register 528b corresponds to the RS hard latch selection register 1 (RSLS1) included in the built-in register of the game control microcomputer 560 as shown in FIG. Note that the 16-bit random number circuit 508b corresponds to the RL0 hard latch selection register 0 (RL0LS0) to RL3 hard latch selection register 3 (RL3LS) shown in FIG.

  The RS0 hard latch random value registers 529a to RS3 hard latch random value registers 529d are RS0 hard latch random value registers (RS0HV) to RS3 hard latch included in the built-in registers of the game control microcomputer 560 as shown in FIG. It corresponds to the random value register (RS3HV). In the case of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b, the RL0 hard latch random value register 0 (RL0HV0) to the RL1 hard latch random value register 1 (RL1HV1) shown in FIG. 8 and the RL2 hard latch random value register 0 (RL2HV0) shown in FIG. ) To RL3 hard latch random number value register 1 (RL3HV1).

  The RS hard latch flag register 530 corresponds to the RS hard latch flag register (RSHF) shown in FIG. Note that the 16-bit random number circuit 508b corresponds to the RL hard latch flag register 0 (RLHF0) to RL hard latch flag register 1 (RLHF1) shown in FIG.

  The RS interrupt control register 531 corresponds to the RS interrupt control register (RSIC) shown in FIG. Note that the 16-bit random number circuit 508b corresponds to the RL interrupt control register 0 (RLIC0) to the RL interrupt control register 1 (RLIC1) shown in FIG.

  The random number soft latch register 532 corresponds to the random number soft latch register (RDSL) shown in FIG. As the soft latch register RDSL, a common register is used in each channel of the 8-bit random number circuit 508a and the 16-bit random number circuit 508b.

  The RS0 soft latch random value registers 533a to RS3 soft latch random value registers 533d correspond to the RS0 soft latch random value registers (RS0SV) to RS3 soft latch random value registers (RS3SV) shown in FIG. Note that the 16-bit random number circuit 508b corresponds to the RL0 soft latch random value (RL0SV) to the RL3 soft latch random value (RL3SV) shown in FIG.

  The random number soft latch flag register 534 corresponds to the random number soft latch flag register (RDSF) shown in FIG. As the random number soft latch flag register RDSF, a common register is used in each channel of the 8-bit random number circuit 508a and the 16-bit random number circuit 508b.

  The random number sequence change selection circuits 523a and 523b follow the setting contents of the 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) and the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 (in the case of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b). , According to the setting contents of 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) and 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2) shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. , “Automatically change from the second lap” or “Automatically change from the first lap” is selected. Then, when any one of “change by software”, “automatic change from the second round” or “automatic change from the first round” is selected, the random number sequence changing circuits 526a and 526b receive random numbers according to the selection method. Change the column. Further, when “Do not change” is selected, control for changing the random number sequence is not performed.

  The random number sequence changing circuits 526a and 526b are circuits that can change the permutation of the numerical data generated by the random number generating circuits 525a and 525b in accordance with instructions from the random number sequence change selecting circuits 523a and 523b. For example, when “change by software” is instructed, the random number sequence change circuits 526a and 526b change the random number sequence updated by the random number generation circuits 525a and 525b by software (user program). In addition, for example, when “automatic change from the second round” is instructed, the random number sequence change circuits 526a and 526b automatically change the random number sequence updated by the random number generation circuits 525a and 525b from the second round. Thereafter, the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence is completed. In addition, for example, when “automatic change from the first round” is instructed, the random number sequence change circuits 526a and 526b automatically change the random number sequence updated by the random number generation circuits 525a and 525b from the first round. Thereafter, the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence is completed.

  The random number generation circuits 525a and 525b are constituted by, for example, an 8-bit counter (in the case of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b, a 16-bit counter), and the like, and predetermined numerical data can be updated based on an input of a random number update clock signal or the like. In the range, the circuit cyclically updates from a predetermined initial value to a predetermined final value. For example, the random number generation circuits 525a and 525b add one by one from the initial value set in the range from “0” to “255” in response to the falling edge in the random number update clock signal. The numerical data is counted up (in the case of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b, the numerical data is incremented by 1 from the initial value set within the range of “0” to “65535” to “65535”. Count up) Then, after counting up to “255”, the numerical data is updated cyclically by counting up from “0” to a numerical value that becomes a final value that is 1 smaller than the initial value.

  The maximum value comparison circuits 527a and 527b are set according to the setting contents of the 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) and the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. In accordance with the setting contents of 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) and 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2) shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the maximum value of the random number values generated by the random number generation circuits 525a and 525b is set.

  FIG. 23A shows a configuration example of the RL0 hard latch selection register 0 (RL0LS0). FIG. 23B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of data stored in the RL0 hard latch selection register 0 (RL0LS0). The data RL01RF stored in the bit number [7] of the RL0 hard latch selection register 0 (RL0LS0) is obtained when the value of the 16-bit random number RL0 is input to the RL0 hard latch random value register 1 (RL0HV1) by an external terminal input. The setting of conditions is shown. In the example shown in FIG. 23B, when setting is made so that the next value is not latched unless a value is read, the bit value of the data RL01RF becomes “0”. When the value is set to be latched, the bit value is “1”. The data RL01RF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  In this embodiment, regarding the register of the program management area and the built-in register, specifically, by setting the corresponding bit in the program management area or the like to a value of “0” or “1”, The corresponding bit value is read, and the read “0” or “1” value is written in the control register of the game control microcomputer 560 by hardware, so that various settings are made. For example, for bit 7 of RL0 hard latch select register 0 (RL0LS0), if the value read from bit 7 is “0”, the control register of game control microcomputer 560 is “0” in hardware. Is set so that the next value is not latched unless a value is read from the RL0 hard latch random value register 1 (RL0HV1). If the value read from bit 7 is “1”, the game control By writing “1” to the control register of the microcomputer 560 for hardware, the next value is latched without reading the value from the RL0 hard latch random value register 1 (RL0HV1). The same applies to each setting item in other program management areas and each bit of each register of the built-in register.

  The data RL01LS0 to RL01LS2 stored in the bit number [6-4] of the RL0 hard latch selection register 0 (RL0LS0) is input to the RL0 hard latch random number value register 1 (RL0HV1) according to which external terminal is input. It shows the setting of whether to import a value. In the example shown in FIG. 23B, when “000” is set in the bit number [6-4] of the RL0 hard latch selection register 0 (RL0LS0), the PI0 terminal is selected and “001” is set. When the PI1 terminal is selected, the PI2 terminal is selected when “010” is set, the PI3 terminal is selected when “011” is set, and “100” is set. In this case, the PI4 terminal is selected, and when “101” is set, the PI5 / XINT terminal is selected. If “110” or “111” is set in the bit number [6-4] of the RL0 hard latch selection register 0 (RL0LS0), the setting is invalid. The data RL01LS0 to RL01LS2 is set to “000” as an initial value.

  The data RL00RF stored in the bit number [3] of the RL0 hard latch select register 0 (RL0LS0) is obtained when the value of the 16-bit random number RL0 is input to the RL0 hard latch random value register 0 (RL0HV0) by an external terminal input. The setting of conditions is shown. In the example shown in FIG. 23B, when setting is made so that the next value is not latched unless a value is read, the bit value of the data RL00RF becomes “0”. When the value is set to be latched, the bit value is “1”. The data RL00RF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RL00LS0 to RL00LS2 stored in the bit number [2-0] of the RL0 hard latch selection register 0 (RL0LS0) is input to the RL0 hard latch random number value register 0 (RL0HV0) according to which external terminal is input to the 16-bit random number RL0. It shows the setting of whether to import a value. In the example shown in FIG. 23B, when “000” is set in the bit number [2-0] of the RL0 hard latch selection register 0 (RL0LS0), the PI0 terminal is selected and “001” is set. When the PI1 terminal is selected, the PI2 terminal is selected when “010” is set, the PI3 terminal is selected when “011” is set, and “100” is set. In this case, the PI4 terminal is selected, and when “101” is set, the PI5 / XINT terminal is selected. When “110” or “111” is set in the bit number [2-0] of the RL0 hard latch select register 0 (RL0LS0), the setting is invalid. The data RL00LS0 to RL00LS2 is set to “000” as an initial value.

  FIG. 24A shows a configuration example of the RL0 hard latch selection register 1 (RL0LS1). FIG. 24B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of data stored in the RL0 hard latch selection register 1 (RL0LS1). The data RL03RF stored in the bit number [7] of the RL0 hard latch selection register 1 (RL0LS1) is obtained when the value of the 16-bit random number RL0 is input to the RL0 hard latch random value register 3 (RL0HV3) by an external terminal input. The setting of conditions is shown. In the example shown in FIG. 24B, when setting is made so that the next value is not latched unless a value is read, the bit value of the data RL03RF becomes “0”. When the value is set to be latched, the bit value is “1”. The data RL03RF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RL03LS0 to RL03LS2 stored in the bit number [6-4] of the RL0 hard latch selection register 1 (RL0LS1) is input to the RL0 hard latch random value register 3 (RL0HV3) according to which external terminal is input to the 16-bit random number RL0. It shows the setting of whether to import a value. In the example shown in FIG. 24B, when “000” is set in the bit number [6-4] of the RL0 hard latch selection register 1 (RL0LS1), the PI0 terminal is selected and “001” is set. When the PI1 terminal is selected, the PI2 terminal is selected when “010” is set, the PI3 terminal is selected when “011” is set, and “100” is set. In this case, the PI4 terminal is selected, and when “101” is set, the PI5 / XINT terminal is selected. When “110” or “111” is set in the bit number [6-4] of the RL0 hard latch selection register 1 (RL0LS1), the setting is invalid. The data RL03LS0 to RL03LS2 is set to “000” as an initial value.

  The data RL02RF stored in the bit number [3] of the RL0 hard latch selection register 1 (RL0LS1) is obtained when the value of the 16-bit random number RL0 is input to the RL0 hard latch random value register 2 (RL0HV2) by external terminal input. The setting of conditions is shown. In the example shown in FIG. 24B, when setting is made so that the next value is not latched unless a value is read, the bit value of the data RL02RF becomes “0”. When the value is set to be latched, the bit value is “1”. The data RL02RF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RL02LS0 to RL02LS2 stored in the bit number [2-0] of the RL0 hard latch selection register 1 (RL0LS1) is input to the RL0 hard latch random number value register 2 (RL0HV2) according to which external terminal is input to the 16-bit random number RL0. It shows the setting of whether to import a value. In the example shown in FIG. 24B, when the bit number [2-0] of the RL0 hard latch selection register 1 (RL0LS1) is set to “000”, the PI0 terminal is selected and “001” is set. When the PI1 terminal is selected, the PI2 terminal is selected when “010” is set, the PI3 terminal is selected when “011” is set, and “100” is set. In this case, the PI4 terminal is selected, and when “101” is set, the PI5 / XINT terminal is selected. If “110” or “111” is set in the bit number [2-0] of the RL0 hard latch selection register 1 (RL0LS1), the setting is invalid. The data RL02LS0 to RL02LS2 is set to “000” as an initial value.

  FIG. 25A shows a configuration example of the RLn hard latch selection register (RLnLS). FIG. 25B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of data stored in the RLn hard latch selection register (RLnLS). In FIG. 25, n takes a value from 0 to 3. Data RLn1RF stored in the bit number [7] of the RLn hard latch selection register (RLnLS) is a condition when the value of the 16-bit random number RLn is input to the RLn hard latch random value register 1 (RLnHV1) by an external terminal input. Shows the settings. In the example shown in FIG. 25B, when setting is made so that the next value is not latched unless a value is read, the bit value of the data RLn1RF becomes “0”, while the next value is not read. When the value is set to be latched, the bit value is “1”. The data RLn1RF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RLn1LS0 to RLn1LS2 stored in the bit number [6-4] of the RLn hard latch selection register (RLnLS) is the value of the 16-bit random number RLn depending on which external terminal is input to the RLn hard latch random value register 1 (RLnHV1). Indicates whether to capture. In the example shown in FIG. 25B, when “000” is set in the bit number [6-4] of the RLn hard latch selection register (RLnLS), the PI0 terminal is selected and “001” is set. In this case, the PI1 terminal is selected. When “010” is set, the PI2 terminal is selected. When “011” is set, the PI3 terminal is selected. When “100” is set. When the PI4 terminal is selected and “101” is set, the PI5 / XINT terminal is selected. If “110” or “111” is set in the bit number [6-4] of the RLn hard latch selection register (RLnLS), the setting is invalid. The data RLn1LS0 to RLn1LS2 is set to “000” as an initial value.

  Data RLn0RF stored in the bit number [3] of the RLn hard latch selection register (RLnLS) is a condition when the value of the 16-bit random number RLn is input to the RLn hard latch random value register 0 (RLnHV0) by an external terminal input. Shows the settings. In the example shown in FIG. 25B, when setting is made so that the next value is not latched unless a value is read, the bit value of the data RLn0RF becomes “0”, while the next value is not read. When the value is set to be latched, the bit value is “1”. The data RLn0RF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RLn0LS0 to RLn0LS2 stored in the bit number [2-0] of the RLn hard latch selection register (RLnLS) is the value of the 16-bit random number RLn depending on which external terminal is input to the RLn hard latch random value register 0 (RLnHV0). Indicates whether to capture. In the example shown in FIG. 25B, when “000” is set in the bit number [2-0] of the RLn hard latch selection register (RLnLS), the PI0 terminal is selected and “001” is set. In this case, the PI1 terminal is selected. When “010” is set, the PI2 terminal is selected. When “011” is set, the PI3 terminal is selected. When “100” is set. When the PI4 terminal is selected and “101” is set, the PI5 / XINT terminal is selected. If “110” or “111” is set in the bit number [2-0] of the RLn hard latch selection register (RLnLS), the setting is invalid. In addition, the data RLn0LS0 to RLn0LS2 is set to “000” as an initial value.

  FIG. 26A shows a configuration example of the RS hard latch selection register 0 (RSLS0). FIG. 26B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of data stored in the RS hard latch selection register 0 (RSLS0). Data RS1RF stored in the bit number [7] of the RS hard latch selection register 0 (RSLS0) is a condition for capturing the value of the 8-bit random number RS1 into the RS1 hard latch random value register (RS1HV) by external terminal input. Shows the settings. In the example shown in FIG. 26B, when setting is made so that the next value is not latched unless a value is read, the bit value of the data RS1RF becomes “0”. When the value is set to be latched, the bit value is “1”. The data RS1RF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RS1LS0 to RS1LS2 stored in the bit number [6-4] of the RS hard latch selection register 0 (RSLS0) is an 8-bit random number RS1 value depending on which external terminal is input to the RS1 hard latch random value register (RS1HV). Indicates whether to capture. In the example shown in FIG. 26B, when “000” is set in the bit number [6-4] of the RS hard latch selection register 0 (RSLS0), the PI0 terminal is selected and “001” is set. When the PI1 terminal is selected, the PI2 terminal is selected when “010” is set, the PI3 terminal is selected when “011” is set, and “100” is set. In this case, the PI4 terminal is selected, and when “101” is set, the PI5 / XINT terminal is selected. If “110” or “111” is set in the bit number [6-4] of the RS hard latch selection register 0 (RSLS0), the setting is invalid. In addition, the data RS1LS0 to RS1LS2 is set to “000” as an initial value.

  Data RS0RF stored in the bit number [3] of the RS hard latch selection register 0 (RSLS0) is a condition for taking the value of the 8-bit random number RS0 into the RS0 hard latch random value register (RS0HV) by inputting an external terminal Shows the settings. In the example shown in FIG. 26B, when setting is made so that the next value is not latched unless a value is read, the bit value of the data RS0RF becomes “0”. When the value is set to be latched, the bit value is “1”. The data RS0RF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RS0LS0 to RS0LS2 stored in the bit number [2-0] of the RS hard latch selection register 0 (RSLS0) is the value of the 8-bit random number RS0 depending on which external terminal input to the RS0 hard latch random value register (RS0HV). Indicates whether to capture. In the example shown in FIG. 26B, when the bit number [2-0] of the RS hard latch selection register 0 (RSLS0) is set to “000”, the PI0 terminal is selected and “001” is set. When the PI1 terminal is selected, the PI2 terminal is selected when “010” is set, the PI3 terminal is selected when “011” is set, and “100” is set. In this case, the PI4 terminal is selected, and when “101” is set, the PI5 / XINT terminal is selected. If “110” or “111” is set in the bit number [2-0] of the RS hard latch selection register 0 (RSLS0), the setting is invalid. Further, the data RS0LS0 to RS0LS2 is set to “000” as an initial value.

  FIG. 27A shows a configuration example of the RS hard latch selection register 1 (RSLS1). FIG. 27B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of data stored in the RS hard latch selection register 1 (RSLS1). Data RS3RF stored in the bit number [7] of the RS hard latch selection register 1 (RSLS1) is a condition for taking the value of the 8-bit random number RS3 into the RS3 hard latch random number value register (RS3HV) by external terminal input Shows the settings. In the example shown in FIG. 27B, when setting is made so that the next value is not latched unless a value is read, the bit value of the data RS3RF becomes “0”. When the value is set to be latched, the bit value is “1”. The data RS3RF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RS3LS0 to RS3LS2 stored in the bit number [6-4] of the RS hard latch selection register 1 (RSLS1) is an 8-bit random number RS3 value depending on which external terminal is input to the RS3 hard latch random number value register (RS3HV). Indicates whether to capture. In the example shown in FIG. 27B, when “000” is set in the bit number [6-4] of the RS hard latch selection register 1 (RSLS1), the PI0 terminal is selected and “001” is set. When the PI1 terminal is selected, the PI2 terminal is selected when “010” is set, the PI3 terminal is selected when “011” is set, and “100” is set. In this case, the PI4 terminal is selected, and when “101” is set, the PI5 / XINT terminal is selected. If “110” or “111” is set in the bit number [6-4] of the RS hard latch selection register 0 (RSLS1), the setting is invalid. In addition, the data RS3LS0 to RS3LS2 is set to “000” as an initial value.

  Data RS2RF stored in the bit number [3] of the RS hard latch selection register 1 (RSLS1) is a condition for taking the value of the 8-bit random number RS2 into the RS2 hard latch random value register (RS2HV) by inputting an external terminal Shows the settings. In the example shown in FIG. 27B, when setting is made so that the next value is not latched unless a value is read, the bit value of the data RS2RF becomes “0”. When the value is set to be latched, the bit value is “1”. The data RS2RF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RS2LS0 to RS2LS2 stored in the bit number [2-0] of the RS hard latch selection register 1 (RSLS1) is an 8-bit random number RS2 value depending on which external terminal is input to the RS2 hard latch random value register (RS2HV). Indicates whether to capture. In the example shown in FIG. 27B, when “000” is set in the bit number [2-0] of the RS hard latch selection register 1 (RSLS1), the PI0 terminal is selected and “001” is set. When the PI1 terminal is selected, the PI2 terminal is selected when “010” is set, the PI3 terminal is selected when “011” is set, and “100” is set. In this case, the PI4 terminal is selected, and when “101” is set, the PI5 / XINT terminal is selected. If “110” or “111” is set in the bit number [2-0] of the RS hard latch selection register 1 (RSLS1), the setting is invalid. In addition, the data RS2LS0 to RS2LS2 is set to “000” as an initial value.

  FIG. 28A shows a configuration example of the RL interrupt control register 0 (RLIC0). FIG. 28B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of data stored in the RL interrupt control register 0 (RLIC0). Note that the bit value of the bit [7-6] of the RL interrupt control register 0 (RLIC0) is always “0”.

  The data RL11IE stored in the bit number [5] of the RL interrupt control register 0 (RLIC0) is forbidden / permitted for an interrupt caused by the random number value taken into the RL1 hard latch random number value register 1 (RL1HV1). Shows the settings. In the example shown in FIG. 28B, when the interrupt is disabled, the bit value of the data RL11IE is “0”, whereas when the interrupt is enabled, the bit value is “1”. . The data RL11IE is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RL10IE stored in the bit number [4] of the RL interrupt control register 0 (RLIC0) is forbidden / permitted for interrupts caused by the random number value taken into the RL1 hard latch random number value register 0 (RL1HV0). Shows the settings. In the example shown in FIG. 28B, when the interrupt is disabled, the bit value of the data RL10IE is “0”, whereas when the interrupt is enabled, the bit value is “1”. . The data RL10IE is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RL03IE stored in the bit number [3] of the RL interrupt control register 0 (RLIC0) prohibits / permits an interrupt due to the fact that the random number value is taken into the RL0 hard latch random number value register 3 (RL0HV3). Shows the settings. In the example shown in FIG. 28B, when the interrupt is disabled, the bit value of the data RL03IE is “0”, whereas when the interrupt is enabled, the bit value is “1”. . The data RL03IE is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RL02IE stored in the bit number [2] of the RL interrupt control register 0 (RLIC0) prohibits / permits an interrupt due to the fact that the random number value is taken into the RL0 hard latch random number value register 2 (RL0HV2). Shows the settings. In the example shown in FIG. 28B, when the interrupt is disabled, the bit value of the data RL02IE is “0”, whereas when the interrupt is enabled, the bit value is “1”. . The data RL02IE is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RL01IE stored in the bit number [1] of the RL interrupt control register 0 (RLIC0) prohibits / permits an interrupt due to the fact that the random number value is taken into the RL0 hard latch random value register 1 (RL0HV1). Shows the settings. In the example shown in FIG. 28B, when the interrupt is disabled, the bit value of the data RL01IE is “0”, whereas when the interrupt is enabled, the bit value is “1”. . The data RL01IE is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RL00IE stored in the bit number [1] of the RL interrupt control register 0 (RLIC0) prohibits / permits an interrupt due to the fact that the random number value is taken into the RL0 hard latch random value register 0 (RL0HV0). Shows the settings. In the example shown in FIG. 28B, when the interrupt is disabled, the bit value of the data RL00IE is “0”, whereas when the interrupt is enabled, the bit value is “1”. . The data RL00IE is set to “0” as an initial value.

  FIG. 29A shows a configuration example of the RL interrupt control register 1 (RLIC1). FIG. 29B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of data stored in the RL interrupt control register 1 (RLIC1). Note that the bit values of the bits [7-6] and [3-2] of the RL interrupt control register 1 (RLIC1) are always “0”.

  The data RL31IE stored in the bit number [5] of the RL interrupt control register 1 (RLIC1) prohibits / permits an interrupt due to the fact that the random number value is taken into the RL3 hard latch random number value register 1 (RL3HV1). Shows the settings. In the example shown in FIG. 29B, when the interrupt is disabled, the bit value of the data RL31IE is “0”, whereas when the interrupt is enabled, the bit value is “1”. . The data RL31IE is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RL30IE stored in the bit number [4] of the RL interrupt control register 1 (RLIC1) prohibits / permits an interrupt due to the fact that a random value is taken into the RL3 hard latch random value register 0 (RL3HV0). Shows the settings. In the example shown in FIG. 29B, when the interrupt is disabled, the bit value of the data RL30IE is “0”, whereas when the interrupt is enabled, the bit value is “1”. . The data RL30IE is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RL21IE stored in the bit number [1] of the RL interrupt control register 1 (RLIC1) prohibits / permits an interrupt due to the fact that the random number value is taken into the RL2 hard latch random number value register 1 (RL2HV1). Shows the settings. In the example shown in FIG. 29B, when the interrupt is disabled, the bit value of the data RL21IE is “0”, whereas when the interrupt is enabled, the bit value is “1”. . The data RL21IE is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RL20IE stored in the bit number [0] of the RL interrupt control register 1 (RLIC1) prohibits / permits an interrupt due to the fact that the random number value is taken into the RL2 hard latch random number value register 0 (RL2HV0). Shows the settings. In the example shown in FIG. 29B, when the interrupt is disabled, the bit value of the data RL20IE is “0”, whereas when the interrupt is enabled, the bit value is “1”. . The data RL20IE is set to “0” as an initial value.

  FIG. 30A shows a configuration example of the RS interrupt control register (RSIC). FIG. 30B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of data stored in the RS interrupt control register (RSIC). The RS interrupt control register (RSIC) is a register that is shared by the 8-bit random number circuit 508a and the free-run counter circuit 507, and bits [7-4] of the RS interrupt control register (RSIC) are free-run. The settings related to the hard latch registers (FRC0 hard latch register (FR0HV) to FRC3 hard latch register (FR3HV)) used by the counter 507 are shown.

  The data RS3IE stored in the bit number [3] of the RS interrupt control register (RSIC) is set to disable / enable interrupts due to the fact that the RS3 hard latch random value register (RS3HV) has received a random value. Is shown. In the example shown in FIG. 30B, when the interrupt is disabled, the bit value of the data RS3IE is “0”, whereas when the interrupt is enabled, the bit value is “1”. . The data RS3IE is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RS2IE stored in the bit number [2] of the RS interrupt control register (RSIC) is set to disable / enable interrupts due to the fact that the random value is taken into the RS2 hard latch random number value register (RS2HV). Is shown. In the example shown in FIG. 30B, when the interrupt is disabled, the bit value of the data RS2IE is “0”, whereas when the interrupt is enabled, the bit value is “1”. . The data RS2IE is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RS1IE stored in the bit number [1] of the RS interrupt control register (RSIC) is set to disable / permit interrupts due to the fact that the random value is taken into the RS1 hard latch random number value register (RS1HV). Is shown. In the example shown in FIG. 30B, when the interrupt is disabled, the bit value of the data RS1IE is “0”, whereas when the interrupt is enabled, the bit value is “1”. . The data RS1IE is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RS0IE stored in the bit number [0] of the RS interrupt control register (RSIC) is set to disable / permit interrupts due to the fact that the random value is taken into the RS0 hard latch random number value register (RS0HV). Is shown. In the example shown in FIG. 30B, when the interrupt is disabled, the bit value of the data RS0IE is “0”, whereas when the interrupt is enabled, the bit value is “1”. . The data RS0IE is set to “0” as an initial value.

  FIG. 31A shows a configuration example of the RLn maximum value setting register (RLnMX). FIG. 31B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of data stored in the RLn maximum value setting register (RLnMX). In FIG. 31, n takes a value from 0 to 3. As shown in FIG. 31B, the maximum value of the 16-bit random number RLn is set in the data RLnMX15 to RLnMX0 stored in the bit number [15-0] of the RLn maximum value setting register (RLnMX).

  FIG. 32A shows a configuration example of the RSn maximum value setting register (RSnMX). FIG. 32B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of data stored in the RSn maximum value setting register (RSnMX). In FIG. 32, n takes a value from 0 to 3. As shown in FIG. 32B, the maximum value of the 8-bit random number RSn is set in the data RSnMX7 to RSnMX0 stored in the bit number [7-0] of the RSn maximum value setting register (RSnMX).

  FIG. 33A shows a configuration example of the random number sequence change register (RDSC). FIG. 33B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of data stored in the random number sequence change register (RDSC). Data RS3SC stored in the bit number [7] of the random number sequence change register (RDSC) indicates a random number sequence change request bit of the 8-bit random number RS3. In the example shown in FIG. 33B, when the random number sequence is set not to be changed, the bit value of the data RS3SC is “0”, whereas when the random number sequence is set to be changed, the bit value is set. Becomes “1”. The data RS3SC is set to “0” as an initial value.

  Data RS2SC stored in the bit number [6] of the random number sequence change register (RDSC) indicates a random number sequence change request bit of the 8-bit random number RS2. In the example shown in FIG. 33B, when the random number sequence is set not to be changed, the bit value of the data RS2SC is “0”, whereas when the random number sequence is set to be changed, the bit value is set. Becomes “1”. The data RS2SC is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RS1SC stored in the bit number [5] of the random number sequence change register (RDSC) indicates the random number sequence change request bit of the 8-bit random number RS1. In the example shown in FIG. 33B, when the random number sequence is set not to be changed, the bit value of the data RS1SC is “0”, whereas when the random number sequence is set to be changed, the bit value is set. Becomes “1”. The data RS1SC is set to “0” as an initial value.

  Data RS0SC stored in bit number [4] of the random number sequence change register (RDSC) indicates a random number sequence change request bit of 8-bit random number RS0. In the example shown in FIG. 33B, when the random number sequence is set not to be changed, the bit value of the data RS0SC is “0”, whereas when the random number sequence is set to be changed, the bit value is set. Becomes “1”. The data RS0SC is set to “0” as an initial value.

  Data RL3SC stored in bit number [3] of the random number sequence change register (RDSC) indicates a random number sequence change request bit of 16-bit random number RL3. In the example shown in FIG. 33B, when the random number sequence is set not to be changed, the bit value of the data RL3SC is “0”, whereas when the random number sequence is set to be changed, the bit value is set. Becomes “1”. The data RL3SC is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RL2SC stored in the bit number [2] of the random number sequence change register (RDSC) indicates the random number sequence change request bit of the 16-bit random number RL2. In the example shown in FIG. 33B, when the random number sequence is set not to be changed, the bit value of the data RL2SC is “0”, whereas when the random number sequence is set to be changed, the bit value is set. Becomes “1”. The data RL2SC is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RL1SC stored in the bit number [1] of the random number sequence change register (RDSC) indicates the random number sequence change request bit of the 16-bit random number RL1. In the example shown in FIG. 33B, when the random number sequence is set not to be changed, the bit value of the data RL1SC is “0”, whereas when the random number sequence is set to be changed, the bit value is set. Becomes “1”. The data RL1SC is set to “0” as an initial value.

  Data RL0SC stored in bit number [0] of the random number sequence change register (RDSC) indicates a random number sequence change request bit of 16-bit random number RL0. In the example shown in FIG. 33B, when the random number sequence is set not to be changed, the bit value of the data RL0SC is “0”, whereas when the random number sequence is set to be changed, the bit value is set. Becomes “1”. The data RL0SC is set to “0” as an initial value.

  FIG. 34A shows a configuration example of a random number soft latch register (RDSL). FIG. 34B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of data stored in the random number soft latch register (RDSL). Data RS3SL stored in bit number [7] of the random number soft latch register (RDSL) indicates a bit for taking the random number value of the 8-bit random number RS3 into the RS3 soft latch random number value register (RS3SV). In the example shown in FIG. 34B, the bit value of the data RS3SL becomes “0” when it is set not to take in the random number value, whereas the bit value when it is set to change the random number sequence. Becomes “1”. The data RS3SL is set to “0” as an initial value.

  Data RS2SL stored in the bit number [6] of the random number soft latch register (RDSL) indicates a bit for taking the random number value of the 8-bit random number RS2 into the RS2 soft latch random number value register (RS2SV). In the example shown in FIG. 34B, the bit value of the data RS2SL becomes “0” when it is set not to take in the random number value, while the bit value when it is set to change the random number sequence. Becomes “1”. The data RS2SL is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RS1SL stored in the bit number [5] of the random number soft latch register (RDSL) indicates a bit for taking the random value of the 8-bit random number RS1 into the RS1 soft latch random value register (RS1SV). In the example shown in FIG. 34B, the bit value of the data RS1SL becomes “0” when it is set not to take in the random number value, while the bit value when it is set to change the random number sequence. Becomes “1”. The data RS1SL is set to “0” as an initial value.

  Data RS0SL stored in bit number [4] of the random number soft latch register (RDSL) indicates a bit for taking the random value of the 8-bit random number RS0 into the RS0 soft latch random value register (RS0SV). In the example shown in FIG. 34B, the bit value of the data RS0SL becomes “0” when the random number value is set not to be captured, while the bit value when the random number sequence is set to be changed. Becomes “1”. The data RS0SL is set to “0” as an initial value.

  Data RL3SL stored in the bit number [3] of the random number soft latch register (RDSL) indicates a bit for taking the random number value of the 16-bit random number RL3 into the RL3 soft latch random value register (RL3SV). In the example shown in FIG. 34B, the bit value of the data RL3SL becomes “0” when the random value is set not to be fetched, while the bit value when the random number sequence is set to be changed. Becomes “1”. The data RL3SL is set to “0” as an initial value.

  Data RL2SL stored in the bit number [2] of the random number soft latch register (RDSL) indicates a bit for taking the random number value of the 16-bit random number RL2 into the RL2 soft latch random number value register (RL2SV). In the example shown in FIG. 34B, the bit value of the data RL2SL becomes “0” when it is set not to take in the random number value, while the bit value when it is set to change the random number sequence. Becomes “1”. The data RL2SL is set to “0” as an initial value.

  Data RL1SL stored in the bit number [1] of the random number soft latch register (RDSL) indicates a bit for taking the random number value of the 16-bit random number RL1 into the RL1 soft latch random number value register (RL1SV). In the example shown in FIG. 34B, the bit value of the data RL1SL becomes “0” when the random value is set not to be captured, while the bit value when the random number sequence is set to be changed. Becomes “1”. The data RL1SL is set to “0” as an initial value.

  Data RL0SL stored in the bit number [0] of the random number soft latch register (RDSL) indicates a bit for taking the random number value of the 16-bit random number RL0 into the RL0 soft latch random value register (RL0SV). In the example shown in FIG. 34B, the bit value of the data RL0SL becomes “0” when the random value is set not to be captured, while the bit value when the random number sequence is set to be changed. Becomes “1”. The data RL0SL is set to “0” as an initial value.

  FIG. 35A shows a configuration example of a random number soft latch flag register (RDSF). FIG. 35B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of data stored in the random number soft latch flag register (RDSF). The data RS3SF stored in the bit number [7] of the random number soft latch flag register (RDSF) indicates that the random number value is taken into the RS3 soft latch random value register (RS3SV). In the example shown in FIG. 35B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RS3SF is “0”, whereas when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “ 1 ". The data RS3SF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RS2SF stored in the bit number [6] of the random number soft latch flag register (RDSF) indicates that the random number value is taken into the RS2 soft latch random value register (RS2SV). In the example shown in FIG. 35B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RS2SF is “0”, whereas when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “0”. 1 ". The data RS2SF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RS1SF stored in the bit number [5] of the random number soft latch flag register (RDSF) indicates that the random number value is taken into the RS1 soft latch random number value register (RS1SV). In the example shown in FIG. 35B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RS1SF is “0”, whereas when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “0”. 1 ". The data RS1SF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RS0SF stored in the bit number [4] of the random number soft latch flag register (RDSF) indicates that the random number value is taken into the RS0 soft latch random value register (RS0SV). In the example shown in FIG. 35B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RS0SF is “0”, whereas when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “0”. 1 ". The data RS0SF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RL3SF stored in the bit number [3] of the random number soft latch flag register (RDSF) indicates that the random number value is taken into the RL3 soft latch random value register (RL3SV). In the example shown in FIG. 35B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RL3SF is “0”, whereas when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “0”. 1 ". The data RL3SF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RL2SF stored in the bit number [2] of the random number soft latch flag register (RDSF) indicates that the random number value is taken into the RL2 soft latch random number value register (RL2SV). In the example shown in FIG. 35B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RL2SF is “0”, whereas when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “0”. 1 ". The data RL2SF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RL1SF stored in the bit number [1] of the random number soft latch flag register (RDSF) indicates that the random number value is taken into the RL1 soft latch random number value register (RL1SV). In the example shown in FIG. 35B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RL1SF is “0”, whereas when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “0”. 1 ". The data RL1SF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  Data RL0SF stored in the bit number [0] of the random number soft latch flag register (RDSF) indicates that the random number value has been taken into the RL0 soft latch random number value register (RL0SV). In the example shown in FIG. 35B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RL0SF is “0”, whereas when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “0”. 1 ". The data RL0SF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  FIG. 36A shows a configuration example of the RLn soft latch random value register (RLnSV). FIG. 36B shows an example of the contents stored in each bit of data stored in the RLn soft latch random value register (RLnSV). In FIG. 36, n takes a value from 0 to 3. As shown in FIG. 36B, the data RLnSV15 to RLnSV0 stored in the bit number [15-0] of the RLn soft latch random value register (RLnSV) are 16 bits taken by the random number soft latch register (RDSL). The value of the random number RLn is stored. When a random number value is fetched, “1” is set in the corresponding bit of the random number soft latch flag register (RDSF).

  FIG. 37A shows a configuration example of the RSn soft latch random number value register (RSnSV). FIG. 37B shows an example of the contents stored in each bit of data stored in the RSn soft latch random value register (RSnSV). In FIG. 37, n takes a value from 0 to 3. As shown in FIG. 37B, the data RSnSV7 to RSnSV0 stored in the bit number [7-0] of the RSn soft latch random number value register (RSnSV) are 8 bits captured by the random number soft latch register (RDSL). The value of the random number RSn is stored. When a random number value is fetched, “1” is set in the corresponding bit of the random number soft latch flag register (RDSF).

  FIG. 38A shows a configuration example of the RL hard latch flag register 0 (RLHF0). FIG. 38B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of data stored in the RL hard latch flag register 0 (RLHF0). The bit value of bit [7-6] of the RL hard latch flag register 0 (RLHF0) is always “0”.

  The data RL11HF stored in the bit number [5] of the RL hard latch flag register 0 (RLHF0) indicates that the random number value is taken into the RL1 hard latch random value register 1. In the example shown in FIG. 38B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RL11HF is “0”, whereas when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “0”. 1 ". The data RL11HF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RL10HF stored in the bit number [4] of the RL hard latch flag register 0 (RLHF0) indicates that a random value has been taken into the RL1 hard latch random value register 0. In the example shown in FIG. 38B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RL10HF is “0”, whereas when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “0”. 1 ". The data RL10HF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RL03HF stored in the bit number [3] of the RL hard latch flag register 0 (RLHF0) indicates that the random value is taken into the RL0 hard latch random value register 3. In the example shown in FIG. 38B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RL03HF is “0”, whereas when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “0”. 1 ". The data RL03HF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RL02HF stored in the bit number [2] of the RL hard latch flag register 0 (RLHF0) indicates that the random value is taken into the RL0 hard latch random value register 2. In the example shown in FIG. 38B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RL02HF is “0”, whereas when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “0”. 1 ". The data RL02HF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RL01HF stored in the bit number [1] of the RL hard latch flag register 0 (RLHF0) indicates that the random value is taken into the RL0 hard latch random value register 1. In the example shown in FIG. 38B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RL01HF is “0”, whereas when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “0”. 1 ". The data RL01HF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RL00HF stored in the bit number [0] of the RL hard latch flag register 0 (RLHF0) indicates that a random value has been taken into the RL0 hard latch random value register 0. In the example shown in FIG. 38B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RL00HF is “0”, whereas when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “0”. 1 ". The data RL00HF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  FIG. 39A shows a configuration example of the RL hard latch flag register 1 (RLHF1). FIG. 39B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of data stored in the RL hard latch flag register 1 (RLHF1). The bit values of the bits [7-6] and [3-2] of the RL hard latch flag register 1 (RLHF1) are always “0”.

  Data RL31HF stored in the bit number [5] of the RL hard latch flag register 1 (RLHF1) indicates that a random number value has been taken into the RL3 hard latch random value register 1. In the example shown in FIG. 39B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RL31HF is “0”, whereas when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “0”. 1 ". The data RL31HF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RL30HF stored in the bit number [4] of the RL hard latch flag register 1 (RLHF1) indicates that a random value has been taken into the RL3 hard latch random value register 0. In the example shown in FIG. 39B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RL30HF is “0”, whereas when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “0”. 1 ". The data RL30HF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RL21HF stored in the bit number [1] of the RL hard latch flag register 1 (RLHF1) indicates that a random value has been taken into the RL2 hard latch random value register 1. In the example shown in FIG. 39B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RL21HF is “0”, whereas when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “0”. 1 ". The data RL21HF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RL20HF stored in the bit number [1] of the RL hard latch flag register 1 (RLHF1) indicates that the random number value is taken into the RL2 hard latch random value register 0. In the example shown in FIG. 39B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RL20HF is “0”, while when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “0”. 1 ". The data RL20HF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  FIG. 40A shows a configuration example of the RS hard latch flag register (RSHF). FIG. 40B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of data stored in the RS hard latch flag register (RSHF). The RS hard latch flag register (RSHF) is a register that is used in common by the 8-bit random number circuit 508a and the free-run counter circuit 507, and bits [7-4] of the RS hard latch flag register (RSHF) are: The settings related to the hard latch registers (FRC0 hard latch register (FR0HV) to FRC3 hard latch register (FR3HV)) used by the free-run counter 507 are shown.

  The data RS3HF stored in the bit number [3] of the RS hard latch flag register (RSHF) indicates that the random number value is taken into the RS3 hard latch random value register (RS3HV). In the example shown in FIG. 40B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RS3HF is “0”, whereas when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “0”. 1 ". The data RS3HF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RS2HF stored in the bit number [2] of the RS hard latch flag register (RSHF) indicates that the random value is taken into the RS2 hard latch random value register (RS2HV). In the example shown in FIG. 40B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RS2HF is “0”, whereas when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “0”. 1 ". The data RS2HF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RS1HF stored in the bit number [1] of the RS hard latch flag register (RSHF) indicates that the random value has been taken into the RS1 hard latch random value register (RS1HV). In the example shown in FIG. 40B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RS1HF is “0”, whereas when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “0”. 1 ". The data RS1HF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RS0HF stored in the bit number [0] of the RS hard latch flag register (RSHF) indicates that the random value is taken into the RS0 hard latch random value register (RS0HV). In the example shown in FIG. 40B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RS0HF is “0”, whereas when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “0”. 1 ". The data RS0HF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  FIG. 41A shows a configuration example of the RL0 hard latch random number value register m (RL0mHV). FIG. 41B shows an example of the contents stored in each bit of data stored in the RL0 hard latch random number value register m (RL0mHV). In FIG. 41, m takes a value from 0 to 3. As shown in FIG. 41B, the data RL0mHV15 to RL0mHV0 stored in the bit number [15-0] of the RL0 hard latch random value register m (RL0mHV) is the 16-bit random number RL0 captured by the external terminal input. Stores the value. When a random value is taken in, “1” is set in the corresponding bit of the RL hard latch flag register 0 (RLHF0).

  FIG. 42A shows a configuration example of the RL1 hard latch random number register m (RL1mHV). FIG. 42B shows an example of the contents stored in each bit of the data stored in the RL1 hard latch random value register m (RL1mHV). In FIG. 42, m takes a value from 0 to 3. As shown in FIG. 42B, the data RL1mHV15 to RL1mHV0 stored in the bit number [15-0] of the RL1 hard latch random number value register m (RL1mHV) are the 16-bit random number RL1 fetched by the external terminal input. Stores the value. When a random value is taken in, “1” is set in the corresponding bit of the RL hard latch flag register 0 (RLHF0).

  FIG. 43A shows a configuration example of the RL2 hard latch random number register m (RL2mHV). FIG. 43B shows an example of the contents stored in each bit of data stored in the RL2 hard latch random number value register m (RL2mHV). In FIG. 43, m takes a value from 0 to 3. As shown in FIG. 43B, the data RL2mHV15 to RL2mHV0 stored in the bit number [15-0] of the RL2 hard latch random value register m (RL2mHV) are the 16-bit random number RL2 fetched by the external terminal input. Stores the value. When a random value is taken in, “1” is set in the corresponding bit of the RL hard latch flag register 1 (RLHF1).

  FIG. 44A shows a configuration example of the RL3 hard latch random number value register m (RL3mHV). FIG. 44B shows an example of the contents stored in each bit of data stored in the RL3 hard latch random number value register m (RL3mHV). In FIG. 44, m takes a value from 0 to 3. As shown in FIG. 44 (B), the data RL3mHV15 to RL3mHV0 stored in the bit number [15-0] of the RL3 hard latch random number register m (RL3mHV) are the 16-bit random number RL3 fetched by the external terminal input. Stores the value. When a random value is taken in, “1” is set in the corresponding bit of the RL hard latch flag register 1 (RLHF1).

  FIG. 45A shows a configuration example of the RSn hard latch random number value register (RSnHV). FIG. 45B shows an example of the contents stored in each bit of data stored in the RSn hard latch random number value register (RSnHV). In FIG. 45, n takes a value from 0 to 3. As shown in FIG. 45 (B), the data RSnHV7 to RSnHV0 stored in the bit number [70] of the RSn hard latch random number register (RLnHV) stores the value of the 8-bit random number RSn fetched by the external terminal input. Is done. When a random value is taken in, “1” is set in the corresponding bit of the RS hard latch flag register (RSHF).

  The timer circuit 509 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG. 4 is an 8-bit programmable timer, and the game control microcomputer 560 includes three channels of 8-bit counters as the timer circuit 509. In this embodiment, it is possible to perform a real-time interrupt request and time measurement by setting by a user program using the timer circuit 509.

  The interrupt controller 510 included in the game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG. 4 includes an external interrupt request from the PI5 / XINT terminal and built-in peripheral circuits (for example, serial communication circuit 512, random number circuits 508a and 508b, timer circuit 509). This is a circuit for controlling an interrupt request from.

  A parallel input port 511 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG. 4 incorporates an 8-bit wide input-only port (PIP). Also, the parallel output port 513 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG. 4 incorporates an 11-bit wide output dedicated port (POP).

  The serial communication circuit 512 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG. 4 is a circuit that performs asynchronous serial communication in the input / output with respect to the outside. The game control microcomputer 560 includes, as the serial communication circuit 512, a 1-channel circuit for both transmission and reception and a 3-channel circuit for transmission only. For example, the circuit for both transmission and reception is used for communication between the game control microcomputer 560 that requires two-way communication and the payout control microcomputer mounted on the payout control board 37, for example. For example, the circuit for transmission only is used for communication from the game control microcomputer 560, which may be one-way communication, to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  The address decode circuit 514 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG. 4 is for decoding each functional block in the game control microcomputer 560 and decoding a chip select signal which is a decode signal for an external device. Circuit. By the chip select signal, an internal circuit of the game control microcomputer 560 or an external device as a peripheral device is selectively operated effectively, and can be accessed from the CPU 56.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. First, in this embodiment, as described above, when a time-out signal from the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b or an IAT signal from the IAT circuit 506a is generated, a user reset or a system reset is generated. Is possible (see FIG. 12). FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a difference in the reset operation depending on the setting content in the reset setting (KRES).

  First, a case where a system reset is set to occur when a time-out signal from the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b or an IAT signal from the IAT circuit 506a is generated will be described with reference to FIG. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46A, when the gaming machine is turned on and power supply is started, the gaming control microcomputer 56 initializes all internal circuits including the CPU core. At the same time, according to the setting contents of the program management area, various settings of the game control microcomputer 560 such as setting of the internal reset operation and setting of the random number circuits 508a and 508b are performed by hardware (step S1001). Specifically, the internal reset operation is set according to the setting contents of the reset setting (KRES) shown in FIG. 12 in the program management area, or the 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (shown in FIGS. 13 to 17 in the program management area). The random number circuits 508a and 508b are set according to the setting contents of KRL1) to 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2). In the example shown in FIG. 46A, the game control microcomputer 56 sets the system reset as the internal reset operation setting according to the setting contents of the program management area. In addition, the setting contents of the program management area are set in advance by a gaming machine manufacturer (user) at the time of manufacturing the gaming machine.

  When various settings of the game control microcomputer 560 are completed, the game control microcomputer 56 shifts to a security mode and executes a security check (step S1002). In the security check executed in step S1002, the user program is authenticated. Specifically, it is recalculated whether the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct. If the authentication code is correct, the process proceeds to step S1003. If the authentication code is not correct, the CPU 56 is stopped. The security mode time to be shifted to the security mode is variable according to the setting contents of the security time setting (KSES) shown in FIG. Specifically, the security mode time is set by setting in step S1001 according to the setting contents of the security time setting (KSES) shown in FIG. 18 of the program management area. It is assumed that the authentication code is written in advance together with the user program by the gaming machine manufacturer (user) when writing into the built-in ROM 54 when the gaming machine is manufactured.

  When the security check is completed, the game control microcomputer 560 shifts to the user mode and starts executing the user program. Specifically, execution of the main process of FIG. 48 described later is started.

  Next, when the user program is being executed (specifically, during execution of a loop process in the main process of FIG. 48 described later or a timer interrupt process of FIG. 49), the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b And the IAT signal from the IAT circuit 506a are generated. In the example shown in FIG. 46A, since the system reset is set as the setting of the internal reset operation in step S1001, the system reset is generated based on the generation of the timeout signal and the IAT signal.

  Similar to step S1001, the game control microcomputer 56 initializes all internal circuits including the CPU core, and sets the internal reset operation and random number circuits 508a and 508b according to the setting contents of the program management area. Various settings of the game control microcomputer 560 such as settings are performed by hardware (step S1005). When various settings of the game control microcomputer 560 are completed, the game control microcomputer 56 shifts to the security mode and executes a security check (step S1006), as in step S1002.

  When the security check is completed, the game control microcomputer 560 shifts to the user mode and starts executing the user program, as in step S1003. Specifically, execution of the main process of FIG. 48 described later is started again.

  Thereafter, each time a time-out signal from the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b or an IAT signal from the IAT circuit 506a is generated, the operations in steps S1004 to S1007 are executed. In FIG. 46A, the specific processing contents of steps S1001 and S1002 are the same as the specific processing contents of steps S1005 and S1006.

  Next, a case where a user reset is set to occur when a time-out signal from the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b or an IAT signal from the IAT circuit 506a is generated will be described with reference to FIG. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46B, when the gaming machine is turned on and power supply is started, the gaming control microcomputer 56 initializes all internal circuits including the CPU core. At the same time, according to the setting contents of the program management area, various settings of the game control microcomputer 560 such as the setting of the internal reset operation and the setting of the random number circuits 508a and 508b are performed by hardware (step S1011). Specifically, the internal reset operation is set according to the setting contents of the reset setting (KRES) shown in FIG. 12 in the program management area, or the 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (shown in FIGS. 13 to 17 in the program management area). The random number circuits 508a and 508b are set according to the setting contents of KRL1) to 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2). In the example shown in FIG. 46B, the game control microcomputer 56 sets the user reset as the setting of the internal reset operation according to the setting contents of the program management area. In addition, the setting contents of the program management area are set in advance by a gaming machine manufacturer (user) at the time of manufacturing the gaming machine.

  When the various settings of the game control microcomputer 560 are completed, the game control microcomputer 56 shifts to the security mode and executes a security check (step S1012). In the security check executed in step S1012, the user program is authenticated. Specifically, it is recalculated whether the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct. If the authentication code is correct, the process proceeds to step S1013. If the authentication code is not correct, the CPU 56 is stopped. The security mode time to be shifted to the security mode is variable according to the setting contents of the security time setting (KSES) shown in FIG. Specifically, the security mode time is set by setting in step S1011 according to the setting contents of the security time setting (KSES) shown in FIG. 18 of the program management area. It is assumed that the authentication code is written in advance together with the user program by the gaming machine manufacturer (user) when writing into the built-in ROM 54 when the gaming machine is manufactured.

  When the security check is completed, the game control microcomputer 560 shifts to the user mode and starts executing the user program. Specifically, execution of the main process of FIG. 48 described later is started.

  Next, when the user program is being executed (specifically, during execution of a loop process in the main process of FIG. 48 described later or a timer interrupt process of FIG. 49), the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b And the IAT signal from the IAT circuit 506a are generated. In the example shown in FIG. 46B, the user reset is generated based on the generation of the time-out signal or the IAT signal because the user reset is set as the setting of the internal reset operation in step S1011.

  When a user reset occurs, the various settings of the game control microcomputer 560 in step S1011 and the security check in step S1012 are not executed. Of the internal circuits of the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU core and timer circuit 509 The free-run counter circuit 507, the arithmetic circuit 505, the parallel input port 511, the parallel output port 513, the serial communication circuit 512, the interrupt controller 510, and the like are initialized. Then, it returns to the top address of the user program as it is, and the execution of the user program is started again from the top address (step S1015). Specifically, execution of the main process of FIG. 48 described later is started again.

  Thereafter, each time the time-out signal from the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b or the IAT signal from the IAT circuit 506a is generated, the operations in steps S1014 to S1015 are executed.

  In this embodiment, when the game control microcomputer 560 reads data stored in the internal RAM area during execution of the user program, all of the upper and lower levels of the internal RAM area in which the data is stored are read. It is possible to read out data by designating only the lower order of the address instead of designating the address of the address. FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of how to read data stored in the internal RAM area. In this embodiment, it is assumed that data referred to by the user program is stored in the F000H to F0FFH areas in the built-in RAM area, and the upper address of the data storage area is always F0H. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a dedicated register (Q register) for storing the upper address of the data storage area as a fixed value, and a fixed value F0H is set in the Q register. .

  In the example shown in FIG. 47, the case where the data stored in the address F020H of the internal RAM area is read is shown. In this case, using the command LDQ for reading data using the Q register, only the lower address 20H is designated and the data read operation is performed (specifically, LDQ A, (20H) is executed). . Then, the CPU 56 specifies the upper address of the data storage area as F0H from the fixed value set in the Q register, specifies the lower address 20H specified by the LDQ instruction, and combines the upper and lower data storage areas. Is specified as F020H. Then, the CPU 56 reads out the data a stored in the data storage area corresponding to the specified F020H and stores it in the register A.

  Note that the value of the Q register is initialized by hardware at the time of system reset and automatically set to the initial value F0H. For example, when power is supplied to the gaming machine and the power supply is started, the lower 4 bits of the Q register are initialized to 0, and the upper 4 bits are inverted by an inverting circuit so that all values become 1. As a result, F0H is automatically set as the initial value of the Q register. As will be described later, in this embodiment, even when the execution of the user program is started, a process for setting the initial value F0H in the Q register is executed by the user program (see step S5A described later).

  The initial value of the Q register may be set only by hardware automatic setting when power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, or by the user program executed when the user program is started. Only setting is acceptable.

  Next, a process that is executed according to the user program after the system check is executed and the mode is changed to the user mode will be described. When shifting to the user mode, the game control microcomputer 560 starts execution of the main process.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings. In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, an interrupt mode is set (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set in the stack pointer (step S3). Then, after initialization of the built-in device (such as initialization of the timer circuit 509, the parallel input port 511, and the parallel output port 513, which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)), the RAM is made accessible. Set (step S5).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets an initial value F0H in the Q register (step S5A). That is, the initial value F0H is set in the Q register at the timing when step S5 is executed and the RAM 55 is set in an accessible state.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal (clear signal) of a clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes normal initialization processing (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not in the on state, the data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing (power-off processing) such as addition of parity data) is performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. It is confirmed whether or not it has been received (step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is determined by, for example, whether the backup monitoring timer value set in the backup RAM area in the power-off process is the same value as the determination value (for example, 2). It can be confirmed that the processing result of the stop processing is saved. Instead of the backup monitoring timer, for example, a backup flag may be set in the power-off process, and in step S7, it may be confirmed whether or not the backup flag is set.

  When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 recovers the game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.), and the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer) ), A portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Further, the CPU 56 transmits a display result designation command designating a display result (probability big hit, normal big hit, sudden probability big hit, small hit, or off) stored in the backup RAM to the effect control board 80 (step). S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S15.

  In this embodiment, the value of a variable time timer (to be described later) is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S44, measurement of the saved variation time timer value is resumed, and the variation display of the special symbol is resumed and saved. When the value of the changed time timer has timed out, a symbol determination designation command to be described later is further transmitted. In this embodiment, a special symbol process flag value, which will be described later, is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is recovered, the special symbol process is resumed from the process corresponding to the value of the stored special symbol process flag.

  Note that the display result designation command is not necessarily transmitted when the power failure is restored, but the CPU 56 may first confirm whether or not the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is zero. . If the value of the variation time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the variation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. It may be determined that the state has not been reached, and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

  Further, the CPU 56 may first check whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. The display result designation command may not be transmitted because it is determined that it is not in the middle.

  In this embodiment, whether or not the data in the backup RAM area is stored is confirmed using both the backup monitoring timer (or backup flag) and the check data, but only one of them is used. May be. In other words, either the backup monitoring timer (or backup flag) or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the gaming state recovery process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. In addition, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing in steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol per-determining random number counter, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags for selectively performing processing according to the control state are initialized. Value is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been performed, that is, initialization notification.

  In step S15, the CPU 56 sets a register of the timer circuit 509 built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to reach when it is not a big hit, The random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win for a normal symbol (normal random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number to determine. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In this embodiment, the reach effect is executed using an effect symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9. Further, when the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the reach effect is always executed. When the display result of the special symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not to execute the reach effect by lottery using a random number. However, it is the production control microcomputer 100 that actually executes the reach production control.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal is output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their state is determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

  Next, the CPU 56 has a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). About the 1st special symbol display 8a, the 2nd special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output with respect to each display according to the content of the output buffer set by step S32, S33. Execute control.

  In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for determination per ordinary symbol used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the big prize opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, the payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 37 in response to the winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S31: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol display control process for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S32).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the variation rate of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer.

Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process is terminated.
With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes in steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. There may be a case where a predetermined combination of effects that does not reach reach is stopped and displayed without reaching reach. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “non-reach” (also referred to as “normally shift”) in a case where the variable display result is a loss symbol.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. After reaching the reach state, a reach effect is executed, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not eventually become a jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach out”) when the variable display result is “out of”.

  In this embodiment, when the big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Eventually, the effect symbols are all stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R on the effect display device 9.

  When “5”, which is a small hit, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display variable display mode is “suddenly probable big hit” on the effect display device 9. In the same manner as in the case where the effect symbol is variably displayed, a predetermined small hit symbol (the same symbol as the sudden probability variation big hit symbol, for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the fact that “5”, which is the small hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol indicator 8b is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. .

  Here, the small win is a hit that is allowed up to a small number of times that the big winning opening is opened compared to the big win (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice). When the small hit game ends, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the probability variation state to the normal state or from the normal state to the certain variation state. In addition, the sudden probability change big hit is allowed up to a small number of times of opening of the big prize opening in the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice), but the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely large. It is a big jackpot that is a short jackpot and the game state after the big jackpot game is shifted to a probabilistic state (that is, by doing so, it appears to the player as if it suddenly became a probable state) Is). In other words, in this embodiment, the sudden winning odds and the small wins have the same opening pattern of the big prize opening. By controlling in such a way, if the winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, it is impossible to recognize whether it is suddenly a big hit or a small hit, so a high probability state for the player (Probable change state) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  50 and 51 are flowcharts showing an example of the power-off process in step S20. In the power-off process, the game control microcomputer 560 first checks whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not it is turned on) (step S450). If not on, the value of the backup monitoring timer formed in the RAM 55 is cleared to 0 (step S451). If it is on, the value of the backup monitoring timer is incremented by 1 (step S452). If the value of the backup monitoring timer matches the determination value (for example, 2) (step S453), the power supply stop processing after step S454, that is, the preparation processing for power supply stop is executed. That is, the state shifts from a state in which the progress of the game is controlled to a state in which a power supply stop process (a power-off control process) for saving the game state is executed. Note that “formed in the RAM” means an area in the RAM.

  By using the backup monitoring timer and the determination value, if the power-off signal is kept on for a time corresponding to the determination value, the power supply stop process is started. That is, even when the power-off signal is turned on for a moment due to noise or the like, the power supply stop process is not erroneously started. Note that the value of the backup monitoring timer is stored by the backup power source for a predetermined period even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. Therefore, in step S8 in the main process, it is possible to confirm that the processing result of the power supply stop process is stored because the value of the backup monitoring timer is the same value as the determination value.

  In the power supply stop process, the game control microcomputer 560 creates parity data (steps S454 to S463). That is, first, clear data (00) is set in the checksum data area (step S454), and the checksum calculation start address corresponding to the start address of the RAM area in which the contents are to be stored even when power supply is stopped is set in the pointer. (Step S455). Further, the number of checksum calculations corresponding to the final address of the RAM area where the contents are to be stored even when the power supply is stopped is set (step S456).

  Next, an exclusive OR of the contents of the checksum data area and the contents of the RAM area pointed to by the pointer is calculated (step S457). The calculation result is stored in the checksum data area (step S458), the pointer value is incremented by 1 (step S459), and the value of the checksum calculation count is decremented by 1 (step S460). Then, the processes in steps S457 to S460 are repeated until the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0 (step S461).

  When the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0, the game control microcomputer 560 inverts the value of each bit of the contents of the checksum data area (step S462). Then, the inverted data is stored in the checksum data area (step S463). This data becomes parity data to be checked when the power is turned on. Next, an access prohibition value is set in the RAM access register (step S471). Thereafter, the built-in RAM 55 cannot be accessed.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the head address of the port clear setting table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S472). In the port clear setting table, the number of processes (the number of output ports to be cleared) is set to the first address, and then the output port address and output value data (clear data: the value of the off state of each bit of the output port) However, the output ports for the number of processes are sequentially set.

  The game control microcomputer 560 loads data at the address pointed to by the pointer (that is, the number of processes) (step S473). Further, the value of the pointer is incremented by 1 (step S474), and the data of the address pointed to by the pointer (that is, the address of the output port) is loaded (step S475). Further, the value of the pointer is incremented by 1 (step S476), and the data of the address pointed to by the pointer (that is, output value data) is loaded (step S477). Then, the output value data is output to the output port (step S478). Thereafter, the number of processes is reduced by 1 (step S479), and if the number of processes is not 0, the process returns to step S474. If the number of processes is 0, that is, if all the output ports to be cleared are cleared, the timer interrupt is stopped (step S481) and the loop process is started. Note that the process of clearing the output port may be executed before the process of creating checksum data. For example, the CPU 56 may execute the output port clear processing in steps S472 to S480 immediately after determining Y in step S453.

  In the loop processing, it is monitored whether or not the power-off signal is turned off (step S482). Then, while the power-off signal is in the ON state (Y in step S482), the process in step S482 is repeatedly executed to stand by.

  On the other hand, when the power-off signal is turned off in step S482 (N in step S482), after setting for a predetermined power-off recovery (step S487), the main process shown in FIG. Return to the beginning. As an example, in the process of step S487, the storage address of the power-off recovery vector table is stored in the stack pointer built in the CPU 56, and the game control timer interrupt process is returned (returned). Here, the power-off recovery vector table may be any table that specifies the head address of the control code (game control program) stored in the ROM 54. When returning from an interrupt process such as the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 49, the stored data at the address specified by the stack pointer is read as the return address. Thus, after executing the processing of step S487, the CPU 56 can start (restart) the execution of the game control from the head of the control code stored in the ROM 54.

  When the power supply is stopped by the above processing, the power supply stop processing in steps S454 to S481 is executed, and data indicating that the power supply stop processing has been executed (backup monitoring having a determination value). Timer and checksum) are stored in the backup RAM, RAM access is disabled, the output port is cleared, and timer interrupt for executing the game control process is set to disabled.

  In this embodiment, after the processing such as generation of check data and output port clear is completed in the power-off processing, the process proceeds to a power-off waiting loop that repeatedly confirms the input of the power-off signal in step S482. Such a configuration for confirming the input of the power-off signal may not be used. In this case, for example, the watchdog timer (WTD) 506b is set to be activated by the user program, and then the watchdog timer (WTD) 506b is activated when entering the power-off waiting loop. When the power supply is not cut off and the voltage value of the power supply does not drop completely, a reset by a time-out signal from the watchdog timer (WTD) 506b may be generated.

  Also, for example, confirm whether or not a power-off signal is input when turning on the power to the gaming machine, and if it is input, transition to an infinite loop or confirm the input of the power-off signal in the infinite loop, When it is configured to continue the infinite loop until there is no more input, the watchdog timer (WTD) 506b is activated when entering the infinite loop in the same manner as described above, and the same processing is performed. It may be configured.

  If the watchdog timer (WTD) 506b is set to be activated (except for the watchdog timer (WTD) 506b that is activated only in the power-off waiting loop as described above), it is normal. The CPU 56 is programmed to output a signal for clearing the watchdog timer (WTD) 506b so as not to time out when the CPU 56 is operating. Specifically, it is programmed to write a value for clearing in a WDT clear register (not shown) provided in the built-in register area.

  In this embodiment, the RAM 55 is backed up by a backup power source (the contents of the RAM 55 are preserved for a predetermined period even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped). In this example, the checksum based on the content of the RAM 55 when the power-off signal is output is stored in the backup area of the RAM 55 together with the value of the backup monitoring timer by the processing of steps S452 to S479. After the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, when the power supply is restored within a predetermined period, the game control means performs the data stored in the RAM 55 (immediately before the power supply is stopped) by the processing of steps S41 to S44 described above. In accordance with the data indicating the game state that is the control state by the game control means (for example, including the process flag state, the big hit flag state, the probability change flag state, the output port output state, etc.) It is possible to return to the state immediately before the supply is stopped. If the power supply stop period exceeds the predetermined period, the value of the backup monitoring timer and the checksum should be different from the regular values. In this case, the initialization process of steps S10 to S13 is executed. The

  As described above, the power supply stop process (preparation process for stopping the power supply) ensures that the data for returning the gaming state to the state immediately before the power supply stopped is the fluctuation data storage means (in this example) Stored in a part of the RAM 55). Therefore, even if the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, if the power is restored within a predetermined period, the gaming state can be returned to the state immediately before the power supply is stopped.

  If the power-off signal is turned off, the process returns to step S1. In this case, since data indicating that the power supply stop process has been executed is set, the recovery process of steps S41 to S44 is executed. Therefore, when the power-off signal from the payout control board 37 is turned off after executing the power supply stop process, the process returns to the state of controlling the progress of the game. Therefore, even if a power interruption or the like occurs, the game control process does not stop, and the game control process is automatically continued.

  46 and 48 to 51, the gaming machine operates in this embodiment, so that in this embodiment, predetermined processing (in this example, steps S16 to S19 of the main processing shown in FIG. 48). When a predetermined event occurs during the execution of the loop processing and the timer interrupt processing of FIG. 49 (IAT signal is input from IAT circuit 506a, timeout signal is input from watchdog timer (WDT) 506b), RAM 55 (backup RAM) ) To initialize the stored contents. Specifically, during the execution of the loop process of steps S16 to S19 of the main process shown in FIG. 48 and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 49, an IAT signal from the IAT circuit 506a or a timeout from the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b When a signal is input, a system reset or a user reset (see steps S1004 and S1014 in FIG. 46) occurs without executing the power-off process shown in FIGS. Then, after a system reset occurs, a security check is executed, and then in step S1007, the process shifts to the user mode and the main process shown in FIG. 48 is started again. After a user reset occurs, the user program is updated in step S1015. Returning to the top, the execution of the main process shown in FIG. 48 is started again. However, since neither the backup monitoring timer (or the backup flag) nor the check data is set, the main process shown in FIG. The process proceeds to S10 and the initialization process is executed.

  Note that the “predetermined process” is a process that is executed in a state where the game is possible after the initialization process and the recovery process at the time of power-on to the gaming machine are executed, as described above. Specifically, the loop process of steps S16 to S19 of the main process shown in FIG. 48 and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 49 are applicable. However, when the power-off process is executed due to the power supply voltage drop, it is excluded from the predetermined process.

  It should be noted that the game machine operates in a manner as shown in FIGS. 46 and 48 to 51, so that predetermined processing is performed after the power supply stop process (in this example, the power-off process shown in FIGS. 50 and 51) is executed. When an event occurs (IAT signal is input from IAT circuit 506a and timeout signal is input from watchdog timer (WDT) 506b), the control status is processed when power supply is stopped based on the stored contents of RAM 55 (backup RAM). Execute recovery processing to restore to the state when started. Specifically, when the power-off process shown in FIGS. 50 and 51 is executed based on the input of the power-off signal and the loop process of FIG. 51 is executed, the IAT signal 506a is just sent from the IAT circuit 506a. When a time-out signal is input from the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b (however, when an IAT signal is input from the IAT circuit 506a, a program outside the designated area is being executed for some reason. Therefore, more precisely, this corresponds to the case where the IAT circuit 506a makes an IAT signal after shifting to the power-off process loop process once), and the system reset or user reset (based on the input of the IAT signal or timeout signal) 46 (see steps S1004 and S1014 in FIG. 46). Then, after a system reset occurs, a security check is executed, and then in step S1007, the process shifts to the user mode and the main process shown in FIG. 48 is started again. After a user reset occurs, the user program is updated in step S1015. Returning to the top, the execution of the main process shown in FIG. 48 is started again. However, since both the backup monitoring timer (or backup flag) and the check data are set, the main process shown in FIG. In both S7 and S8, it is determined as Y, and the recovery process in steps S41 to S44 is executed.

FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing each software random number used in this embodiment. Each software random number is used as follows. As described above, in this embodiment, a hardware random number output from the 16-bit random number circuit 508b is used for the big hit determination random number (random R) for determining whether or not to win.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot described later) (for jackpot type determination)
(2) Random 2 (MR2): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR3): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the initial value of random 4)
In this embodiment, the hardware random number extracted from the random number circuit is used only for the jackpot determination random number (random R), and the software random number is used for the other random numbers. It is not limited to what is shown in. For example, in addition to the jackpot determination random number (random R), hardware random numbers extracted from the random number circuit may be used for all of random numbers 1 to 5 shown in FIG. In addition, hardware random numbers extracted from the random number circuit may be used for only some of the random numbers 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 52, and software random numbers may be used for the rest.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is first determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and then the variation pattern determined using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). One of the variation patterns included in the pattern type is determined. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. For example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by reach type, and include a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach A, and a variation pattern with super reach B. It may be divided into variable pattern types. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations of pseudo-continuations, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern without pseudo-ream, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of one re-variation, It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of two variations and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of three variations. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped according to the presence / absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo ream or a slip effect.

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 49, the game control microcomputer 560 uses a counter for generating the jackpot type determination random number (1) and the random number for determination per ordinary symbol (4). Count up (add 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. For example, an initial value determining random number for determining the initial value of the jackpot type determining random number (random 1) may be provided. In this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) is used as the jackpot determination random number.

  FIG. 53A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal-time jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state) and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 53 (A) is set in the normal jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 53 (A) is set in the probability variation big hit determination table. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 53 (A) is the jackpot determination value.

  53 (B) and 53 (C) are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The small hit determination table includes a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and a small hit determination table used when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. (For the second special symbol). Each value described in FIG. 53 (B) is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) is set in FIG. 53 (C). Each numerical value listed is set. In addition, the numerical values described in FIGS. 53B and 53C are small hit determination values.

  Note that it may be determined that a small hit is made only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the small hit may not be provided when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In this case, the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 53 (C) may not be provided. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is shifted to the probability changing state, the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Even if the game state is shifted to the probability change state, a small hit will be generated, and if it is configured to produce an effect asking whether or not the probability change will occur, even though the current game state is the probability change state On the contrary, it makes the player feel annoying. Therefore, if it is configured so that the small hit does not occur during the variation display of the second special symbol, if the gaming state is the probability variation state, it is difficult for the small hit to occur and the excessive effect is not given to the probability variation. This can prevent the player from feeling annoyed.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R). The jackpot determination random number is shown in FIG. If it matches one of the big hit determination values shown in (2), it is decided to make a big hit (a normal big hit, a probability variation big hit, and a sudden probability variation big hit, which will be described later) with respect to the special symbol. Further, when the big hit determination random number value matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 53B and 53C, it is determined to make a small hit for the special symbol. Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 53A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. In addition, “probabilities” shown in FIGS. 53B and 53C indicate the probability (ratio) of small hits. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state, but stopping in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53B and 53C, when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/300. On the other hand, when using the small hit determination table (second special symbol), a case where the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize is given to the first start winning opening 13 and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the start winning prize is given to the second starting winning prize slot 14 and the second special symbol is displayed. The ratio determined as “small hit” is higher than when the variable display is executed.

  53D and 53E are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. FIG. Among these, FIG. 53 (D) determines the jackpot type using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). This is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a. FIG. 53 (E) shows a case where the jackpot type is determined by using the stored memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, based on the random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type, the jackpot type is set to “normal jackpot”, “ This table is referred to in order to determine one of “probability big hit” and “sudden probability big hit”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53D and 53E, 10 determination values are assigned to the “suddenly probable big hit” in the big hit type determination table 131a (40 minutes). 3 is assigned to the jackpot type determination table 131b for “sudden probability change big hit” (a ratio of 3/40). Will suddenly be determined to be a promising big hit). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first special symbol variation display is executed by starting the first start winning port 13 and the second special symbol of the second special symbol is displayed. Compared with the case where the variable display is executed, the ratio determined as “suddenly probable big hit” is high. Note that “sudden probability variation big hit” is assigned only to the first special symbol jackpot type determination table 131a, and “sudden probability variation big hit” is not assigned to the second special symbol big hit type determination table 131b (ie, It may be determined that “suddenly probable big hit” may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 (D) and (E), two rounds of sudden probability change big hits as the first specific gaming state to which a predetermined amount of gaming value is given, and more than the gaming value The case where 15 rounds of big hit (probable big hit or normal big hit) is determined as the second specific gaming state to which the amount of gaming value is given will be explained. However, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, Although the case where it is determined to be one specific gaming state is shown, the gaming value to be given is not limited to the number of rounds as shown in this embodiment. For example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the allowable amount of the winning number (count number) of game balls to the big winning opening per round is increased as the gaming value is determined. Also good. Further, for example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the opening time of the big winning opening per game during the big hit may be determined as the gaming value. In addition, for example, even if the same 15 round big hits, the first specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening once per round and the second specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening multiple times per round It may be prepared to increase the gaming value of the second specific gaming state by substantially increasing the number of times the special winning opening is opened. In this case, for example, in any case of the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state, when the big winning opening is opened 15 times (in this case, all 15 rounds in the case of the first specific gaming state) In the case of the second specified gaming state, there will be an undigested round), and an effect in which the jackpot will be further continued (so-called rank-up bonus effect) You may make it perform. And in the case of the first specific gaming state, all the 15 rounds have been finished internally, so the big hit game is finished, and in the case of the second specific gaming state, there remains an undigested round internally. For this reason, the jackpot game may be continued (the effect that the bonus winning opening is additionally started with a bonus after finishing the bonus hit of 15 times). As described above, the game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes an advantageous state for a player who is easy to win, or an advantageous state for a player. For example, a situation where a condition for winning a prize ball is likely to be established.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53D and 53E, there are “normal big hit”, “probability big hit” and “sudden probability big hit” as the big hit types.

  The “probable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to 15 rounds of the big hit gaming state and shifts to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state is finished (in this embodiment, the game is changed to the probable change state and the short time state is also entered. (See steps S170 and S171 described later). After the transition to the probability variation state, the probability variation state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S134 described later).

  In addition, the “ordinary big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to the big round gaming state of 15 rounds and is not shifted to the probability change state after the big hit gaming state is ended, but is shifted only to the short time state (see step S167 described later). . Then, after shifting to the time reduction state, the time reduction state is maintained until the execution of the variable symbol display of the special symbol and the effect symbol is completed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) (see steps S142 to S145 described later). In this embodiment, the time reduction state also ends when a big hit occurs after the transition to the time reduction state and before the execution of the predetermined number of variable displays is ended (see step S134 described later).

  In addition, “suddenly promising big hit” means that the number of times of opening the big winning opening is smaller than in “probable big hit” or “normal big hit” (in this embodiment, opening for 0.1 second is allowed twice). Is a big hit. In other words, when “suddenly promising big hit”, the game is controlled to a two round big hit gaming state. In this embodiment, after the two-round jackpot gaming state is finished, the state is changed to the probability changing state (in this embodiment, the state is changed to the probability changing state and also to the short time state. Step S170 to be described later). , S171). After the transition to the probability variation state, the probability variation state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S134 described later).

  As described above, in this embodiment, even in the case of “small hit”, the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds each, Similar control is performed. In the case of “small hit”, the game state does not change after the opening of the big winning opening twice, and the game state before “small hit” is maintained (described later). Steps S147 to S151). By doing so, it is made impossible to recognize whether it is “suddenly promising big hit” or “small hit”, and the interest of the game is improved.

  The big hit type determination tables 131a and 131b are numerical values to be compared with a random 1 value, and corresponding to the “normal big hit”, “probability variable big hit”, and “suddenly probable big hit” (big hit type determination value) ) Is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

  54 and 55 are flowcharts showing an example of a special symbol process (step S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 turns on the first start winning opening 13 when the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 is turned on. If a winning has occurred, a first start port switch passage process is executed (steps S311 and S312). If the second start port switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning port 14 is turned on, that is, the start winning to the second start winning port 14 has occurred. Then, the second start port switch passage process is executed (steps S313, S314). Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

The processes in steps S300 to S310 are as follows.
Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the pending storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total pending storage number counter. In addition, if the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, a lottery process using a big hit determination random number (random R) is executed to display a variable display result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Decide whether or not to win. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is defined as the variation display variation time of the special symbol. Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  More specifically, in the above-described variation pattern setting process (step S301), the CPU 56 selects and determines a variation pattern provided according to the determined big hit type or the deviation. The data table for determination and the data table for determining the variation pattern (data table stored in the ROM 54) are selectively used according to the gaming state, and the value of the random counter (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type The variation pattern type is selected and determined based on the above, and the variation pattern is selected and determined based on the value of the random counter for determining the variation pattern (random 3).

  The fluctuation pattern selected and determined in the fluctuation pattern setting process includes the fluctuation pattern when the reach is lost due to normal reach, the fluctuation pattern when the reach is lost due to long reach, the fluctuation pattern when the reach is lost due to super reach, and the non-reach pattern Fluctuation pattern when the reach is lost, fluctuation pattern when the probability is a big or normal big hit with normal reach, fluctuation pattern when the positive or a big big hit or normal big hit with a no-long reach, when a positive or big hit is given with a super reach Various fluctuation patterns, such as a fluctuation pattern for a sudden big hit, a fluctuation pattern for a small hit, and the like. Here, “reach miss” means that a reach display result is obtained after reaching reach. Further, non-reach out means that the result of display is out of reach without reaching reach. The long reach is a reach that has a relatively long duration in the reach state compared to the normal reach. Super reach is a reach that is highly reliable for generating big hits compared to normal reach. In the variation pattern setting process (S301), a variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern selected and determined is transmitted.

  Note that the symbol feed effect described later is executed in a long reach variation pattern having a lower reliability than the super reach among these variation patterns. However, it may be executed in a fluctuation pattern with high reliability of jackpot occurrence such as super reach instead of a fluctuation pattern with low reliability of jackpot occurrence such as long reach, and the fluctuation pattern for executing the symbol feed effect is appropriate. It can be changed.

  Display result designation command transmission process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the design control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol. Control to transmit the specified command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the fourth symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. When neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0). In this embodiment, as will be described later, a special symbol display control for stopping and displaying a special symbol stop symbol in the special symbol display control process based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data (see FIG. 56), and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control processing in step S22.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S306 (6 in this example). The pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting an effect control command for round display during the big hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming the completion of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S307 (7 in this example).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time reduction flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big prize opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). It should be noted that the small hit pre-release process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the small hit pre-release process is a process for starting the small hit game.

  Small hit release processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Processing to confirm the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening is performed. If the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S308 (8 in this example). When all rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S310 (in this example, 10 (decimal number)).

  Small hit end processing (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the start-port switch passing process in steps S312 and S314. Among these, FIG. 56 (A) is a flowchart showing the first start port switch passing process of step S312. FIG. 56B is a flowchart showing the second start port switch passing process in step S314.

  First, the first start port switch passing process will be described with reference to FIG. In the first start port switch passing process executed when the first start port switch 13a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first hold port number). Whether or not the value of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the memory number is 4 is confirmed (step S201A).

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S202A), and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S203A).

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts a value from each counter for generating software random numbers (a jackpot type determination random number (random 1), a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern determination random number (random 3)). (Step S204A). Further, the CPU 56 extracts numerical data as a big hit determination random number (random R) from the RL0 hard latch random value register 0 (RL0HV0) used by the channel 0 16-bit random number circuit 508b (step S205A).

  As already described with reference to FIG. 23, the RL0 hard latch random value register based on the signal (latch signal) from any terminal depending on the setting contents of bits 2-0 of the RL0 hard latch select register 0 (RL0LS0). Whether to latch the random value to 0 (RL0HV0) is set. Further, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the detection signal from the first start port switch 13a is inputted as a latch signal to the set terminal, and the start winning to the first start winning port 13 has occurred. The random number value can be latched in the RL0 hard latch random value register 0 (RL0HV0) at the timing.

  Then, the CPU 56 executes a process of storing those extracted software random numbers and jackpot determination random numbers (random R) in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 57) (step S206A). Note that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted in the first start port switch passing process (at the time of start winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to holding storage. As shown in FIG. 57, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In this embodiment, the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first reserved memory number addition designation command designating that the first reserved memory number has increased by 1 to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S207A).

  If the first pending storage number has reached the upper limit (Y in step S201A), the CPU 56 extracts numerical data from the RL0 hard latch random value register 0 (RL0HV0) (step S208A), and the extracted numerical data (random number) ) Is not stored, and the first start port switch passing process is terminated. That is, in this embodiment, bit 3 of RL0 hard latch select register 0 (RL0LS0) in the program management area shown in FIG. 23 is set to “0”, and a value is read from RL0 hard latch random number register 0 (RL0HV0). Otherwise, it is assumed that the next value cannot be latched. Therefore, even when the first reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value, the CPU 56 performs only the process of extracting numerical data from the RL0 hard latch random number value register 0 (RL0HV0) (until the value is stored). RL0 hard latch random value register 0 (RL0HV0) can latch the next value.

  Note that bit 3 of RL0 hard latch select register 0 (RL0LS0) is set to “1” and the next value can be latched without reading the value from RL0 hard latch random value register 0 (RL0HV0). Also good. In such a case, the process of step S208A becomes unnecessary.

  Next, the second start port switch passing process will be described with reference to FIG. In the second start port switch passing process executed when the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second hold port number). It is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting the stored number is 4) (step S201B).

  If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increments the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S202B), and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S203B).

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts a value from each counter for generating a software random number (a jackpot type determination random number (random 1), a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern determination random number (random 3)). (Step S204B). Further, the CPU 56 extracts numerical data as a big hit determination random number (random R) from the RL1 hard latch random value register 0 (RL1HV0) used by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of the channel 1 (step S205B).

  As already described with reference to FIG. 25, the RL1 hard latch random value register 0 based on the signal (latch signal) from any terminal depending on the setting contents of bits 2-0 of the RL1 hard latch selection register (RL1LS). Whether or not to latch a random value in (RL1HV0) is set. Further, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the detection signal from the second start port switch 14a is input as a latch signal to the set terminal, and the start winning to the second start winning port 14 occurs. The random number value can be latched in the RL1 hard latch random number value register 0 (RL1HV0) at the timing.

  Then, the CPU 56 executes processing for storing the extracted software random number and jackpot determination random number (random R) in the storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 57) (step S206B). Note that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted in the second start port switch passing process (at the time of start winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of the variation of the second special symbol. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second reserved memory number addition designation command designating that the second reserved memory number has increased by 1 to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S207B).

  If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (Y in step S201B), the CPU 56 extracts numerical data from the RL1 hard latch random value register 0 (RL1HV0) (step S208B), and the extracted numerical data (random number) ) Is not stored, and the second start port switch passing process is terminated. That is, in this embodiment, bit 3 of the RL1 hard latch selection register (RL1LS) in the program management area is set to “0” (corresponding to n = 1 in FIG. 25), and the RL1 hard latch random value It is assumed that the next value cannot be latched unless a value is read from register 0 (RL1HV0). Therefore, even when the second reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value, the CPU 56 performs only the process of extracting numerical data from the RL1 hard latch random number value register 0 (RL1HV0) (until the value is stored). RL1 hard latch random value register 0 (RL1HV0) can latch the next value.

  Note that bit 3 of RL1 hard latch select register 0 (RL1LS) is set to “1” and the next value can be latched without reading the value from RL1 hard latch random value register 0 (RL1HV0). Also good. In such a case, the process of step S208B becomes unnecessary.

  Further, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S205A and S205B, the random value register that is different between the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol. A random number value is extracted from and stored. By doing so, for example, the change display of the first special symbol is executed by changing the start value of random number update, changing the setting of changing the random number sequence, or changing the setting of the random number maximum value. The random number value can be made difficult to synchronize between the case where it is performed and the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and it is difficult to perform an act such as illegally generating a big hit aiming at a predetermined random number update timing. .

  In this embodiment, the random number value is extracted from the different channels (channel 0 and channel 1 in this example) of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b, and the first special symbol variation display is executed. Although the case where the random number value register for extracting the random number is different from the case where the special symbol variation display is executed is shown, it is not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment. For example, even in the same channel of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b, from different hard latch random number value registers used in the same channel (for example, RL0 hard latch random number value register 0 (RL0HV0) and RL0 hard latch random number value of the same channel 0) By extracting the random number value (from the register 1 (RL0HV1)), the random number value register for extracting the random number is different between the case where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. It may be allowed.

  In this embodiment, the case where the random number value is extracted from the hard latch random value register has been described. However, for example, the random value may be extracted from the soft latch random value register. Even in this case, the first special symbol can be obtained by extracting random values from different channels of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b or by extracting random values from different soft latch random number registers even in the same channel. The random number value register for extracting random numbers may be made different between the case where the variable display is executed and the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

  In this embodiment, the case where the random value is extracted from the 16-bit random number circuit 508b has been described. However, for example, the random value may be extracted from the 8-bit random number circuit 508a. Even in this case, a random value is extracted from a different channel of the 8-bit random number circuit 508a, or a random value is extracted from a different hard latch random value register or soft latch random value register even in the same channel. Thus, the random number value register for extracting random numbers may be different between the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

  In this embodiment, as already described, the game control microcomputer 560 executes steps S1001 and S1011 when the power to the gaming machine is turned on, and performs settings related to the random number circuits 508a and 508b in hardware. Then, during the execution of the user program, the random number extraction process of steps S205A and S205B is executed in the first start port switch passage process (see step S312) and the second start port switch passage process (see step S314). Therefore, in this embodiment, the setting relating to the monitoring of the random number circuit is performed before the timing of extracting the numerical data (random number value) from the random number circuit.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 4 ms) (step S7001). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S7002). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S7003) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S7004).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (step S7005). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 performs the fourth symbol process (step S7006). In the 4th symbol process, the process corresponding to the current control state (4th symbol process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9 are selected. The display control of the 4th symbol is executed.

  Next, a random number update process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number is executed (step S7007). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7002.

  By executing such effect control main processing, the effect control microcomputer 100 transmits the effect display device 9, various lamps, and the like according to the effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 and received. By controlling the production device such as the speaker 27, various production controls according to the gaming state are performed.

  For example, in the effect control microcomputer 100, when the received variation pattern command is received, the effect symbol variation display is started, and when the symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect symbol variation display is stopped. The fluctuation pattern command includes the length of the fluctuation time, presence / absence of reach production, reach type (normal reach, long reach, super reach, etc.) when the reach production is executed, and the fluctuation display result (big hit, off, big hit) The information necessary for designating the variable display mode such as (type) is a command composed of specific data. The fluctuation display is controlled so as to be executed at a fluctuation time corresponding to each fluctuation pattern command. Further, the stop symbol of the effect symbol is determined based on determining whether the game is out of play or jackpot based on the display result designation command and determining the jackpot type when the jackpot is hit.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (in this example, input of an IAT signal from IAT 506a, input of a timeout signal from watchdog timer (WDT) 506b). It is possible to set whether to generate the first reset (system reset in this example) or the second reset (user reset in this example) (see bit 7 of the reset setting (KRES) shown in FIG. 12). ). The security check is executed after the first reset occurs, while the security check is not executed after the second reset occurs. Therefore, the type of reset to be performed when a predetermined event occurs according to the situation of the gaming machine or game store can be set to an optimum one, so that the security related to the game control microcomputer 560 can be improved.

  In this embodiment, as the occurrence of the predetermined event, the case where the IAT signal from the IAT 506a is input and the case where the time-out signal is input from the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b are shown. The game control microcomputer 560 is not limited to that shown in the embodiment, and may be reset based on the occurrence of a certain event such as an error that should be reset.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the occurrence of the predetermined event includes a timeout of the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b, and it is possible to set whether or not to activate the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b (this book) In the example, "0000" is set in bits 3-0 of the reset setting (KRES) shown in FIG. Even when it is set not to activate the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b, it is possible to set whether to generate the first reset or the second reset based on the occurrence of the predetermined event. Specifically, even if “0000” is set in bits 3-0 in the reset setting (KRES) shown in FIG. 12, the type of reset can be set by setting bit 7. Therefore, regardless of the setting of the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b, the setting of the type of reset that is generated based on the occurrence of the predetermined event can be made common.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the occurrence of the predetermined event includes an out-of-designated area execution (in this example, out-of-designated area prohibition (IAT)) that executes a program stored in an area other than the designated area. The game control microcomputer 560 performs a timer interrupt process (timer interrupt shown in FIG. 49) that is executed in response to a timer interrupt that occurs every predetermined time (4 ms in this example) as a predetermined process. When execution outside the specified area occurs during execution of processing (in this example, an IAT signal is input from the IAT circuit 506a), the storage contents of the RAM 55 (backup RAM) are initialized (in this example, after reset) 48 is executed.) Therefore, it is possible to improve security when an unintended program is executed.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when it is set to generate the first reset, after the predetermined event occurs and the first reset is generated, the first reset is performed based on the occurrence of the predetermined event. It is set again whether to generate or to generate the second reset. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46A, when a system reset occurs, step S1005 is executed, and various settings of the game control microcomputer 560 are executed again in hardware. The system reset or the user reset is set again. Therefore, it is possible to reliably recover from an abnormal state to a normal state.

  In this embodiment, specifically, after a predetermined event occurs (input of IAT signal from IAT 506a, input of timeout signal from watchdog timer (WDT) 506b) and system reset occurs, Although the case where the reset setting is set again (see step S1005 in FIG. 46A) is shown, even when a user reset occurs, the same processing as in step S1005 is executed to set the internal reset setting again. You may make it do.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the random number clock signal for updating the numerical data held by the numerical value holding means (in this example, the hard latch random value register or the soft latch random value register) of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b. Random number circuit monitoring means (in this example, update monitoring circuit 537) capable of monitoring the occurrence of an abnormality in the frequency of the external clock signal (in this example) and the update state of the numerical data held by the numerical value holding means is provided. Therefore, the occurrence of an abnormality in the frequency of the random number clock signal can be monitored and the update state of the numerical data can be monitored, so that the security of the random number circuit (16-bit random number circuit 508b in this example) installed in the gaming machine is improved. be able to.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the control CPU (CPU 56 in this example) installed in the game control microcomputer 560 includes the first information (in this example, the upper address of the data storage area) and the second information. Based on (in this example, the lower address of the data storage area), the address corresponding to the area where the data to be read is stored is specified, and the data to be read is read from the area corresponding to the specified address. In this case, when reading the data to be read, the first information is based on the specific value (“F0H” stored as a fixed value in this example) stored in the storage means (Q register in this example). And the second information specified by the control instruction (in the example shown in FIG. 47, “20H” specified by the LDQ command (one of the programmed instructions)) is specified. Therefore, by using the storage means (Q register in this example), there is no need to specify a fixed portion (higher address in this example) of the address of the data storage area with a command every time. It is possible to reduce the waste when a processing instruction is executed (the waste of a program that designates a common part of an address).

  Further, according to this embodiment, the control CPU (in this example, the CPU 56), at the timing when access to the RAM 55 is permitted after power supply to the gaming machine is started (step S5 in FIG. 48). 48), a value (F0H in this example) indicating a part of the address corresponding to the work area provided in the RAM 55 is stored as a specific value in the storage means (Q register in this example) (step S5A in FIG. 48). reference). Therefore, by storing a specific value in the storage means at a timing when access to the RAM 55 is permitted, waste of a program for designating an address corresponding to a work area provided in the RAM 55 thereafter is reduced. Can do.

  In this embodiment, the specific value is stored as follows: (1) processing for storing the specific value in the storage means at a timing when access to the RAM 55 is permitted; and (2) always storing the specific value in the storage means. The case where both the structure made into the state currently made is provided is shown. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the execution of the user program is started and the main process shown in FIG. 48 is started, a process for setting the initial value F0H in the Q register is executed by the user program (step At the same time as the system reset, the Q register n value is automatically set to the initial value F0H. For example, when power is supplied to the gaming machine and the power supply is started, the lower 4 bits of the Q register are initialized to 0, and the upper 4 bits are inverted by an inverting circuit so that all values become 1. As a result, F0H is automatically set as the initial value of the Q register. However, the initial value of the Q register may be set only by a user program executed at the start of the user program, or a hardware automatic operation performed when power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started. Only setting is OK.

  In this embodiment, a command that can be used as a control command in the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the gaming machine includes a register data and an address specified by another 2-byte register according to a predetermined rule. There are an RLD command and an RRD command (both are one of programmed instructions) that can be exchanged with data stored (stored). For example, if the RLD command is used to replace the data in register A with the data stored (stored) at the address specified by the 2-byte register, the upper 4 bits of data in register A remain unchanged. The lower 4 bits of data in A are transferred to the lower 4 bits of the address specified by the 2-byte register, and the lower 4 bits of the data stored (stored) at the address specified by the 2-byte register are stored in the 2-byte register. It is possible to move to the upper 4 bits of the address designated by the upper 4 bits of the data stored (stored) at the address designated by the 2-byte register to the lower 4 bits of the register A. In this case, for example, if data in a non-writable area (for example, data in the ROM area) is specified as data stored (stored) at an address specified by a 2-byte register, a 2-byte register is used. Only the operation of reflecting the upper 4 bits of the data stored (stored) at the address specified by the 2-byte register in the lower 4 bits of the register A while leaving the data stored (stored) at the specified address as it is Can also be executed.

  For example, when the data of the register A and the data stored (stored) at the address specified by the 2-byte register are exchanged using the RRD command, the upper 4 bits of the data of the register A are not changed. The lower 4 bits of data in register A are transferred to the upper 4 bits of the address specified by the 2-byte register, and the upper 4 bits of the data stored (stored) at the address specified by the 2-byte register are 2 bytes. It is possible to move to the lower 4 bits of the address designated by the register, and to move the lower 4 bits of the data stored (stored) at the address designated by the 2-byte register to the lower 4 bits of the register A. In this case, for example, if data in a non-writable area (for example, data in the ROM area) is specified as data stored (stored) at an address specified by a 2-byte register, a 2-byte register is used. The lower 4 bits of the data stored (stored) at the address specified by the 2-byte register is reflected in the lower 4 bits of the register A while the data stored (stored) at the specified address remains unchanged. It is also possible to execute only the operation.

  In the above-described embodiment, a pre-reading notice effect that is executed before the start of the variable display that is the target of the notice effect may be executed. When configured to execute the pre-reading notice effect, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 passes the first start opening switch at the timing when the start winning to the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 occurs. In the process (refer to step S312) or the second start port switch passage process (refer to step S314), the determination at the time of starting winning is performed, and control for transmitting a determination result command at the time of winning indicating the determination result is performed. In this case, for example, as a winning determination result command, whether or not it is a big hit, whether it is a small hit, a symbol designating command indicating a determination result of the type of jackpot, and the value of a random number for variation pattern type determination A variation category command indicating a determination result (determination result of variation pattern type) indicating which range of determination values is to be transmitted is transmitted. Therefore, in this case, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the reserved memory number addition designation command (first reserved memory number addition designation command, first command) 2 pending storage number addition designation command) is transmitted.

  The first reserved memory number addition designation command is a command that is transmitted when the first starting prize opening 13 is won, and in this sense, the first holding prize number 13 indicating that the first winning prize opening 13 has been won. It is also a 1 start opening prize designation command. Further, since the second reserved memory number addition designation command is a command that is transmitted when a start winning prize is given to the second start winning prize opening 14, in this sense, the second winning prize winning opening 14 indicating that the start winning prize has been indicated. It is also the 2 start entry prize designation command. Hereinafter, the first start opening prize designation command (first reserved memory number addition designation command) and the second start opening prize designation command (second reserved memory number addition designation command) are collectively referred to as a starting opening prize designation command.

Hereinafter, an operation in a case where the prefetch notice effect is configured to be executable will be described.
FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S7005 of FIG. 58 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 59, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a prefetch notice determination process for determining the presence / absence of a prefetch notice effect and an effect mode (step S161).

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of the prefetch notice determination process executed in step S161 of FIG. In the prefetch notice determination process shown in FIG. 60, the effect control CPU 101 first stores the stored contents in the start winning reception command buffer for storing a start winning command transmitted based on the start winning determination result at the start winning. A check is made (step S701). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a new received command that is at least one of the commands at the time of starting winning (step S702). For example, at least one of a symbol designation command, a variable category command, or a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command, a second reserved memory number addition designation command) is newly added to the reception command buffer at the start winning prize Whether or not there is a received command can be determined by checking whether or not it is stored in. If no command has been newly received (step S702; No), the prefetch notice determination process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S702 that there is a reception command (step S702; Yes), it is determined whether or not a prefetch notice effect is already being executed (step S703). For example, in the process of step S703, it may be determined that the prefetching notice effect is being executed when the prefetching notice execution flag indicating that the prefetching notice effect is being executed is on. The pre-reading notice execution flag is set to the on state when the prefetching notice effect is executed.

  In this embodiment, when the pre-reading notice effect is already being executed, the pre-reading notice effect is executed in the already determined effect mode so that the process for executing the pre-reading notice effect is not further performed. On the other hand, when the pre-reading notice effect is executed based on the winning determination result that the variable display mode is determined as “non-reach”, the winning determination result that the variable display result is determined as “hit” When a winning determination result indicating that the pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern with or reach is obtained, the pre-reading notice effect being executed may be switched to a super reach or jackpot notice effect. Note that the pre-reading notice effect may be further executed regardless of the effect of the pre-reading notice effect that has already been executed.

  If the pre-reading notice effect is not being executed in step S703 (step S703; No), it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice restriction that restricts the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is being executed (step S704). If the pre-reading notice is not restricted in step S704 (step S704; No), the order and contents of the received commands based on the occurrence of the start winning prize are checked (step S706), and it is determined whether or not the reception is successful. (Step S707). In the process of step S707, for example, whether or not the received commands at the start winning prize are in order, whether or not all the received commands have been received without omission, and whether or not the contents of the symbol designation command and the variation category command are consistent. Confirmation is made and if any one of them is denied, it may be determined that the signal could not be normally received. In addition, it is not limited to what determines that abnormality has occurred when any one is denied. For example, it may be determined that abnormality has occurred when any two are denied. Alternatively, when all are denied, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  If it is determined in step S707 that the signal has been received normally (step S707; Yes), the previous variation category command stored in the start winning reception command buffer is checked (step S708), and the current It is determined whether the number of reserved memories (for example, the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number) is “3” or “4”, and the variation category up to the previous time is only non-reach loss. (Step S709). That is, in this embodiment, when there are two or three hold data whose variable display result is “non-reach loss”, the continuous notice effect is executed using the hold data.

  Note that if the number of reserved memories is a sufficient number for executing the continuous notice effect (for example, 2 or more), the continuous notice effect may be executed. For example, like the continuous notice effect (prefetch notice effect) of the prefetch notice pattern SYP3-1 to be described later, except for the notice pattern in which the effect mode changes, it is continuous when the number of reserved memories that can notify that it is a series of effects. A notice effect may be executed. In this way, it is possible to improve the overall execution frequency of the continuous notice effect.

  In addition, when a pre-reading notice effect other than the stop symbol notice is executed, the continuous notice effect may be executed even when holding data whose variable display result is “non-reach lose” is included. In this case, since a reach may occur during the execution of the continuous notice effect or a “hit” may occur, an unexpected effect can be executed. When a continuous notice effect is to be executed when hold data with a variable display result of “non-reach lose” is included, for example, in a variable display with reach, a continuous notice of an effect other than a stop symbol notice The production may be selected. In this way, it is possible to execute the continuous notice effect regardless of the display result before the variable display to be prefetched is executed.

  For example, in the process of step S708, the number of data received before the latest variation category command and stored in the start winning reception command buffer, and the variation category specified by the variation category command are determined. read. In the process of step S709, it is determined based on the reading result in step S708 whether the number of data is “3” or “4” or only the variable category command that specifies the variable category corresponding to the non-reach loss. .

  If it is determined in step S709 that the current number of pending storages is “3” or “4”, and the previous variation category is non-reach loss, In step S709; Yes, it is determined whether or not to execute the prefetching notice effect and a prefetching notice pattern corresponding to the prefetching notice effect in the case of executing the prefetching notice effect (step S710).

  As an example, in the process of step S710, a prefetch notice determination table prepared in advance is selected and set as a use table for determining the presence or absence of the prefetch notice effect and the prefetch notice pattern. In the pre-reading notice determination table, a numerical value (compared with a random number value for determining the pre-reading notice type according to the designation contents of the variable category command transmitted based on the occurrence of the start winning corresponding to the variable display to be noticed) ( The determination value) may be assigned to a determination result of “no execution” corresponding to the case where the prefetching notice effect is not executed, a plurality of prefetching notice patterns when the prefetching notice effect is executed, or the like. Thereafter, the CPU 101 for effect control extracts, for example, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the pre-reading notice, and refers to the pre-reading notice determination table based on the numerical data, thereby determining the presence or absence of the pre-reading notice effect and the pre-reading notice. What is necessary is just to determine a pattern.

  In the process of step S710, for example, the presence / absence of the prefetching notice effect and the prefetching notice pattern may be decided at a decision rate as shown in FIG. In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 61, the presence / absence of the pre-reading notice effect and the determination ratio of the pre-reading notice pattern are varied depending on the variation category.

  In this embodiment, four types of pre-reading notice patterns, SYP1-1, SYP1-2, SYP2-1, and SYP3-1, are provided. The pre-reading notice patterns SYP1-1 and SYP1-2 constitute a chance for a continuous effect predetermined in the effect display device 9 over a plurality of variable displays until the variable display to be notified is executed. This is a prefetching notice pattern corresponding to a stop symbol notice in which the decorative symbol stops. In the stop symbol announcement based on the pre-read notice pattern SYP1-1, any one of the chance eyes CA1 to CA8 (chance eye A) shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 62A, the chance eye A is a combination of numbers in which the left symbol and the middle symbol are the same number, and only the right symbol is shifted by one. Further, in the stop symbol advance based on the prefetching advance notice pattern SYP1-2, any of chance chances CB1 to CB6 (chance eye B) shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 62 (B), the chance eye B is a combination of sequence numbers. In this embodiment, as will be described later, it is possible that a big hit will be given when the stop symbol notice that the chance eye B stops is executed, rather than when the stop symbol notice that the chance eye A stops is executed. The reliability (big hit reliability) is high. By doing in this way, when the stop symbol notice is executed, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which chance is stopped, and the interest of the game is improved.

  The chance eye A and the chance eye B are not limited to those shown in FIGS. 62A and 62B, and may be any predetermined combination that can be distinguished from each other. For example, the chance eye A may be an arbitrary combination of even numbers that are normal symbols (non-probable variation symbols), and the chance eye B may be an arbitrary combination of odd numbers that are probability variation symbols. By doing in this way, it becomes easy for the player to recognize which chance is the chance.

  In the pre-reading notice pattern SYP2-1, the background image in the effect display device 9 changes from a normal background image to a special background image during the variable display prior to the execution of the variable display that is the subject of the notice. This is a look-ahead notice pattern corresponding to executing a background change notice serving as a special background image until a target variable display is executed.

  The prefetching notice pattern SYP3-1 is a prefetching notice pattern corresponding to executing a prefetching notice effect that changes to a background change notice after the stop symbol notice that the chance eye A stops is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 61, in this embodiment, the rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is executed depending on whether the variation category is “non-reach lose”, “reach lose”, “accuracy / small hit”, or “big hit”, The determination rate of the prefetch notice pattern is different.

  Specifically, when the fluctuation category is “reach loss”, the pre-reading notice effect is executed (the rate determined other than “execution”) is higher than when it is “non-reach loss”. In the case where the variation category is “big hit”, the pre-reading notice effect is executed more frequently than in the case of “non-reach lose”, “reach lose”, and “accuracy / small hit”. With such a setting, by executing the pre-reading notice effect, it is possible to give a notice / indication that the variable display result is “big hit” or that the reach is executed. If the variation category is “Accuracy / Small Hit”, “Accuracy” or substantial In order to prevent the player from being discouraged by becoming a “small hit” in which the game state does not change in addition to not being able to get a ball (prize ball), the pre-reading notice effect may not be executed. Good.

  In addition, in the determination ratio shown in FIG. 61, the prefetching notice effect of the prefetching notice pattern SYP1-2 in which the chance eye B is stopped is greater than the case where the prefetching notice effect of the prefetching notice pattern SYP1-1 in which the chance eye A is stopped is executed. When the is executed, the rate at which the variable display result is “big hit” (big hit reliability) and the rate at which reach is executed (reach reliability) are higher. Thus, since the big hit reliability and the reach reliability are different depending on the type of chance, the player comes to pay attention to the stop symbol, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, when the prefetching notice effect of the prefetching notice pattern SYP2-1 of the background change notice is executed, compared to the case where the prefetching notice effect of the stop symbol notice such as the prefetching notice pattern SYP1-1 or the prefetching notice pattern SYP1-2 is executed. The higher the jackpot reliability and reach reliability.

  Further, the prefetching notice of the prefetching notice pattern SYP3-1 that changes from the stop symbol notice to the background change notice than when the predesign notice effect of the stop symbol notice such as the prefetch notice pattern SYP1-1 or the prefetch notice pattern SYP1-2 is executed. The jackpot reliability and reach reliability are higher when the performance is executed.

  In this way, even if the pre-reading notice effect of the stop symbol notice with low jackpot reliability or reach reliability is executed, it may change to a background change notice with high hit reliability or reach reliability, Even when the stop symbol notice is executed, the player expects to change to the background change notice, so that the player's expectation can be maintained and the interest of the game is improved.

  In particular, the prefetching notice effect of the prefetching notice pattern SYP3-1 is changed from the same effect form (effect form in which the chance eye A stops) to the background change notice as the prefetch notice pattern SYP1-1 having the lowest jackpot reliability and reach reliability. It is going to change. As a result, even when a pre-reading notice effect with the lowest hit reliability or reach reliability and when the chance eye A stops is executed, the player's expectation can be maintained and the interest of the game is improved.

  In this embodiment, there is a case in which the chance symbol A stops from the stop symbol advance notice to the background change notice, while the stop symbol advance notice that the chance eye B stops does not change to the background change notice (changes). The ratio is 0%). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be a case where the chance symbol B changes from a stop symbol advance notice to a background change advance notice. In this case, if the rate of change to the background change notice is different between the case where the stop symbol notice that the chance eye A stops is executed and the case that the stop symbol notice that the chance eye B stops is executed. Good. Specifically, it is possible to make the change from the stop symbol notice that the chance eye A with a low jackpot reliability or reach reliability when the background change notice does not change stop more easily to the background change notice. preferable. By doing in this way, even when a stop symbol notice with a low jackpot reliability or reach reliability is executed, the player's expectation can be maintained, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, the big hit reliability and the reach reliability are higher when the prefetching notice effect of the prefetching notice pattern SYP3-1 is executed than when the prefetching notice effect of the prefetching notice pattern SYP2-1 is executed. Yes. By such setting, the player is more expected to change to the background change notice, the player's sense of expectation can be further maintained, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Note that when the game state is a big hit game state or a small hit game state, it may be limited not to execute the prefetch notice effect. Whether or not the game state is a big hit gaming state can be determined, for example, in accordance with whether or not the value of the effect process flag is “6” or “7”. Further, whether or not the game state is a small hit game state can be determined, for example, corresponding to whether or not the value of the effect process flag is “4” or “5”.

  On the other hand, even when the gaming state is the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the pre-reading notice effect may be made executable. For example, after receiving a start winning command based on the occurrence of a start winning, when the number of rounds executed in the big hit gaming state reaches a predetermined number (for example, “10”), it is stored in the start winning received command buffer. It is also possible to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect by reading the symbol designating command or the variable category command, and to execute the pre-reading notice effect during the round. In this case, as a pre-reading notice effect, for example, an effect of a one-notification notification mode that definitely notifies that the variable display result becomes “big hit” after the end of the current big hit gaming state is executed. May be.

  Based on the determination by the process of step S710 illustrated in FIG. 60, it is determined whether or not “no execution” is performed in which the prefetch notice effect is not executed (step S711). At this time, if it is other than “no execution” (step S711; No), a setting for starting execution of the prefetching notice effect according to the determined prefetching notice pattern is performed (step S712). In step S712, the number of reserved memories (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number) is set as the initial count value in the prefetch notice execution number counter indicating the number of variable displays for executing the prefetch notice effect. Setting corresponding to the fact that the pre-reading notice effect is being executed, such as setting the middle flag to the on state. In addition, the prefetching advance notice pattern determined in step S710 and the prefetching notice effect control pattern corresponding to the current reserved memory number (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number) are set.

  FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a list of prefetch notice effect control patterns. As shown in FIG. 63, the prefetching advance notice effect control pattern SCP1-1 corresponding to the prefetching notice pattern SYP1-1 corresponding to the number of reserved memories (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number), A prefetching notice effect control pattern SCP1-2 and a prefetching notice pattern SYP1-2 corresponding to the prefetching notice pattern SYP1-1 and the number of reserved memories (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number) being four. The pre-reading notice effect control pattern SCP2-1 and the prefetching notice pattern SYP1-2 corresponding to the number of reserved memories (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number) being 3, and the reserved memory number (first The pre-reading notice effect control pattern SCP2-2 and the pre-reading notice pattern SYP2-1 corresponding to the fact that the number of one hold memory and the second hold memory number is 4, and the number of hold memories (first The prefetching notice effect control pattern SCP3-1 and the prefetching notice pattern SYP2-1 corresponding to the fact that the retained memory number and the second reserved memory number are 3 are the reserved memory numbers (the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number). The pre-reading notice effect control pattern SCP3-2 and the pre-reading notice pattern SYP3-1 corresponding to the fact that the number of memories) is 4, and the number of reserved memories (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number) is 3. The prefetching notice effect control pattern SCP4-1 corresponding to the above and the prefetching notice pattern SYP3-1 and the number of reserved memories (the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) are four. A control pattern SCP4-2 is provided. As shown in FIG. 63, each prefetching notice effect control pattern is composed of control data corresponding to the contents of the effect executed in each variation after the prefetching notice effect is started.

  As shown in FIG. 63, in the case of the prefetching notice pattern SYP3-1, the background change notice is executed at the second change after the prefetching notice effect is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the background change notice may be executed at the time of the change that is the target of the prefetching notice effect or at the time of the change one time before the change that is the target of the prefetching notice effect. For example, when the pre-reading notice pattern SYP3-1 is determined, the timing for executing the background change notice may be further determined, and the pre-reading notice effect control pattern corresponding to the determination result may be selected. . In this case, the determination ratio of the timing for executing the background change notice may be varied depending on the display result (variation category) of the change that is the target of the prefetch notice effect. By doing in this way, after the pre-reading notice effect of the stop symbol notice is executed, the big hit reliability and the reach reliability can be varied depending on the timing at which the background change notice is executed.

  After executing the process of step S712, when it is determined in step S703 that the pre-reading notice effect is being executed (step S703; Yes), when it is determined in step S704 that the pre-reading notice is being restricted ( Step S704; Yes), when it is determined in Step S709 that the current reserved memory number (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number) is not “3” or “4”, or the variation category up to the previous time Is determined not to be a non-reach loss (step S709; No), or when it is determined "no execution" in step S711 (step S711; Yes), stored in the start winning reception command buffer The latest start opening winning designation command is the first starting opening winning designation command (first reserved memory number addition designation frame). Determines whether the de) (step S713).

  When it is the first start opening winning designation command (first reserved memory number addition designation command) in step S713 (step S713; Yes), the first special figure is used as the hold display in the first hold memory display unit 18c. Control is performed to update the display portion corresponding to the newly reserved special game (step S714). In step S714, control is performed to update the hold display in the first hold storage display unit 18c in a normal display mode (for example, a round white display). Thereafter, the prefetch notice determination process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S713 that the command is not the first start opening winning designation command (first pending memory number addition designation command) (step S713; No), as the pending display in the second reserved memory display unit 18d. Then, control is performed to update the display part corresponding to the fact that the special figure game using the second special figure is newly suspended (step S715). In step S715, control is performed to update the hold display in the second hold storage display unit 18d in a normal display mode (for example, a round white display). Thereafter, the prefetch notice determination process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S707 that the command at the start winning prize has not been received normally (step S707; No), the undetermined information is set corresponding to the latest command in the command command received at the start winning prize (step S707). S731). For example, an undetermined information storage area may be provided for each buffer number in the start winning received command buffer, and the undetermined information of the buffer number corresponding to the latest command may be set to “1” (or ON state).

  After executing the process of step S731, the display parts indicating the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are common as the hold display in the first hold memory display unit 18c and the second hold memory display unit 18d, respectively. The display mode is changed to an abnormal display mode (for example, a round gray display), and the display portion corresponding to the newly held display is also displayed in the common abnormal display mode (step S732). The display mode at the time of abnormal is different from the normal display mode or special display mode by changing part or all of the display color, display shape, display character, etc. of the display part, It is only necessary to be able to recognize in a recognizable manner that a failure has occurred. While only the display part corresponding to the newly reserved state is set as the display form at the time of non-normality, the display form in other display parts may not be changed.

  After executing the processing of step S732, for example, after setting for prefetching notice restriction such as setting the prefetching notice restriction flag to ON state (step S733), the prefetching notice determination process is terminated.

  In such a pre-reading notice determination process, when it is determined in step S707 that the command at the start winning prize has not been received normally, the process of step S710 is not executed, so that the pre-reading notice effect is not executed.

  For example, when a part or all of the determination result information such as a symbol designation command or a variable category command that designates the determination result when the start winning is generated is recognizable, the execution of the variable display corresponding to the reserved storage ends. Up to this point, the pre-reading notice effect may not be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pre-reading notice effect and the variable display result from being inconsistent and prevent the player from feeling distrust.

  For example, when a part of the judgment result information such as a symbol designation command or a variation category command is missed, even if the judgment result can be recognized by other judgment result information, the pre-reading notice effect based on the judgment result is not executed. You may restrict | limit. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the pre-reading notice effect from being executed based on information with low credibility, and to prevent the player from feeling distrust.

  For example, if judgment results that can be recognized from multiple pieces of judgment result information such as symbol designation commands and variable category commands do not match, it is limited not to perform the pre-reading notice effect based on the judgment result that can be recognized by any judgment result information. May be. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the pre-reading notice effect from being executed based on information with low credibility, and to prevent the player from feeling distrust.

  When the special figure game using the second special figure is executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure, when the high base state in which the high opening control associated with the time reduction control is performed, You may restrict | limit so that the pre-reading notice effect based on generation | occurrence | production of the start winning (1st start winning) by the game ball having passed (entering) 1 start winning opening may not be performed. When the high opening control is being performed, it is possible to continue to execute the special game using the second special figure that is preferentially executed by passing (entering) the game ball to the second start winning opening. . Therefore, the execution of the prefetching notice effect is started based on the hold data of the special figure game using the first special figure before the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the prefetching notice effect is continuously executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Then, the variable display can be continuously executed many times in a state where the hold data or the like whose variable display result is “big hit” is held, and can be changed by executing the special figure game using the second special figure. The display result is “big hit”, and the gambling of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be remarkably improved because the game is repeatedly controlled to the big hit gaming state. Further, while recognizing that the variable display result is “big hit” in the special game using the first special figure, the player repeatedly passes (enters) the game ball to the second start winning opening and makes the second special game. Depending on whether the special figure game using the figure is repeatedly executed or the special figure game using the first special figure is executed without passing (entering) the game ball to the second start winning opening, the variable display result is “ There is a possibility that the timing at which the game is set to “big hit” and controlled to the big hit gaming state may be greatly changed depending on the skill of the player. Therefore, by limiting the execution of the pre-reading notice effect based on the occurrence of the first start prize when in the high base state, the variable display result becomes “big hit” corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure. It is possible to ensure sound gameability by preventing the player from recognizing the possibility.

  In addition to this, for example, when a part or all of the stored information such as the start opening prize designation command is missed in the high base state, the judgment result information such as the symbol designation command and the variable category command is normally received. Even if it does, you may restrict | limit so that a prefetch notice effect may not be performed. This prevents the player from recognizing that the variable display result may be a “big hit” corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure. Can be secured.

  On the other hand, for example, when a part of the stored storage information such as the start opening prize designation command is missed, it is permitted to execute at least a part of the prefetching notice effect (for example, the prefetching notice effect having the lowest reliability). Good. As a result, it is possible to execute the pre-reading notice effect using the command that can be normally received as much as possible, and to prevent the execution frequency of the pre-reading notice effect from being excessively reduced.

  For example, when a part of the determination result information such as a symbol designation command or a variation category command is missed, it is permitted to execute at least a part of the prefetching notice effect (for example, the prefetching notice effect having the lowest reliability). May be. As a result, it is possible to execute the pre-reading notice effect using the command that can be normally received as much as possible, and to prevent the execution frequency of the pre-reading notice effect from being excessively reduced.

  Or, for example, when judgment results that can be recognized from a plurality of judgment result information such as a symbol designation command and a variation category command do not match, at least a part of the prefetching notice effect (for example, the prefetching notice effect having the lowest reliability) is executed. You may be allowed to do. As a result, it is possible to execute the pre-reading notice effect using the command that can be normally received as much as possible, and to prevent the execution frequency of the pre-reading notice effect from being excessively reduced.

  After the prefetch notice determination process is executed in step S161 shown in FIG. 59, a prefetch notice restriction release setting process is executed (step S162). In the prefetching notice restriction release setting process, when prefetching notice restriction is restricted so that the prefetching notice effect is not executed, a process for releasing the restriction based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and a prefetching notice effect being executed are performed. In response to the completion, a process for enabling execution of a new prefetch notice effect is executed. For example, when the pre-reading notice execution flag is on, every time the change starts, the value of the remaining notice counter is decremented by 1, and the remaining notice counter is 0. The pre-reading notice execution flag is reset to the off state. In addition, when the pre-reading notice restriction flag is in the on state, the start winning command that is stored effectively corresponding to each of the buffer numbers “1” to “8” in the start winning reception command buffer, On the condition that all the orders and contents can be received correctly, the restriction that prevents the prefetching notice effect from being executed, for example, is cleared by clearing the prefetching notice restriction flag, for example. It should be noted that the restriction that prevents the pre-reading notice effect from being executed may be canceled on the condition that the pending storage in which the command is missed or the determination result is inconsistent is exhausted.

  After executing the prefetch notice restriction release setting process in step S162 shown in FIG. 59, for example, depending on the value of the effect process flag, one of the following processes in steps S170 to S177 is selected and executed.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. In this variable display start waiting process, whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the effect display device 9 based on whether or not the first variation start command or the second variation start command from the main board 31 is received. The process etc. which determine are included.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process corresponds to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, and the decorative symbols in the effect display device 9 In order to perform various display operations and other various presentation operations, it includes a process of determining a definite decorative pattern and various presentation control patterns according to the variation pattern of the special symbol, the type of display result, and the like.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the effect process during variable display, the effect control CPU 101 reads out various control data from the effect control pattern corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer, and performs various effect controls during variable display of the decorative symbols. . After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols has been read from the special symbol variation effect control pattern, or a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 31 has been received. Corresponding to the above, the final decorative symbol as the final stop symbol that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is displayed in a completely stopped manner. Corresponding to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command (fluctuation pattern command) if the fixed decoration symbol is completely stopped and displayed in response to the end code being read from the special figure fluctuation production control pattern When the variable display time to be passed has elapsed, even if the production control command from the main board 31 is not used, it is possible to autonomously derive and display the determined decorative pattern on the production control board 80 side to confirm the variable display result. it can. When the finalized decorative symbol is displayed as a complete stop, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In the waiting process per special figure, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 31 has been received. When the hit start specifying command is received and the hit start specifying command specifies the start of the big hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is “6” corresponding to the big hit effect processing. Update to On the other hand, when the hit start designation command is received and the hit start designation command designates the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit medium production process. To “4”. Also, when the production control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is “lost”, and the value of the production process flag is the initial value. Update to “0”.

  The small hitting effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In the small hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 101 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Or outputting a voice or sound effect from the speaker 27 by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound output board 70, or setting the frame LED 28 or the decoration LED 25 by outputting a command (electric decoration signal) to the lamp driver board 35. Various effect control in the small hit gaming state such as lighting / extinguishing / flashing is executed. In the small hit effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5” which is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 31. .

  The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 101 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state and the like, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Or outputting a voice or sound effect from the speaker 27 by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound output board 70, or setting the frame LED 28 or the decoration LED 25 by outputting a command (electric decoration signal) to the lamp driver board 35. Various effect controls such as lighting / extinguishing / flashing are performed at the end of the small hit gaming state. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  The big hit effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In the jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 101 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the jackpot gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the display screen of the effect display device 9. In addition, by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound output board 70, sound and sound effects are output from the speaker 27, and by outputting a command (electric decoration signal) to the lamp driver board 35, the frame LED 28 and the decoration LED 25 are turned on / Various effect control in the big hit gaming state such as turning off / flashing is executed. In the big hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 31, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to “7” which is a value corresponding to the ending effect processing.

  The ending effect process in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 101 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the display screen of the effect display device 9. The sound and sound effect are output from the speaker 27 by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound output board 70, and the frame LED 28 and the decoration LED 25 are turned on / off by outputting a command (electric decoration signal) to the lamp driver board 35. Various effect control is executed at the end of the big hit gaming state such as blinking. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S171 of FIG. 59 as variable display start setting processing. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 64, the effect control CPU 101 first reads EXT data in a variable display result notification command (display result designation command) (display result designation command) transmitted from the main board 31, for example. For example, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “lost” (step S522). When it is determined that the special figure display result is “lost” (step S522; Yes), for example, by reading the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command (variation pattern command) transmitted from the main board 31, It is determined whether or not the designated variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” (step S523).

  If it is determined in step S523 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S523; Yes), a combination of fixed decorative symbols that is the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination is determined (step S524). As an example, in the processing of step S524, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like is extracted, and a predetermined left determined symbol determining table stored in advance in a ROM or the like is referred to. As a result, the left determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” effect symbol display area 9L in the display area of the effect display device 9 is determined among the determined decorative symbols. Next, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like is extracted, and a predetermined decorative symbol is determined by referring to a predetermined right determined symbol determining table stored in advance in a ROM or the like. Among them, the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” effect symbol display region 9R in the display area of the effect display device 9 is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table. Subsequently, by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining the medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like and referring to a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in a ROM or the like, the fixed decorative symbol is Among them, the medium-decorated decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area 9C in the display area of the effect display device 9 is determined. In the process of step S524, a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination that becomes a predetermined chance symbol symbol may be determined in response to the case where the changing symbol notice is being executed.

  If it is determined in step S523 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S523; No), a combination of a confirmed decorative symbol that is a final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is determined (step S525). As an example, in the process of step S525, first, numerical data indicating random values for determining left and right determined symbols updated by a random counter or the like is extracted, and a predetermined left and right determined symbol determination table stored in advance in a ROM or the like is referred to. As a result, among the confirmed decorative symbols, the decorative symbol with the same symbol number that is stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” effect symbol display regions 9L and 9R in the display area of the effect display device 9 is determined. To do. Further, by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining the medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like and referring to a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in a ROM or the like, Among them, the medium fixed decoration symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area 9 </ b> C in the display area of the effect display device 9 is determined. Here, for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol, an arbitrary value (For example, “1”) may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-decorated decorative symbol so that the finalized decorative symbol is not the jackpot combination but the reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol, a difference (design difference) between the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-decorated decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When it is determined in step S522 that the special figure display result is not “lost” (step S522; No), the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, or the special figure display It is determined whether the result is “small hit” or other cases (step S526). When it is determined that it is “Accuracy” or “Small hit” (step S526; Yes), for example, a definite decoration that becomes a final stop symbol corresponding to the case of “Accuracy” or “Small hit” such as an opening chance. A combination of symbols is determined (step S527). As an example, the final stop symbol that constitutes one of a plurality of types of opening chances corresponding to the case where any variation pattern for accuracy / small hit is designated by a variation pattern designation command (variation pattern command). The combination of the determined decorative design is determined. In this case, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the chance index updated by a random counter or the like is extracted, and an opening chance index is determined by referring to a predetermined chance index determination table stored in advance in a ROM or the like. It is sufficient to determine the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols constituting any of the above. In addition, when any variation pattern that designates reach is designated by the variation pattern designation command (variation pattern command), the final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is executed by executing, for example, the same processing as step S525. What is necessary is just to determine the combination of the definite design which becomes.

  When it is determined in step S526 that it is “non-probability change” or “probability change” other than “probability” or “small hit” (step S526; No), the final decorative symbol that becomes the final stop symbol constituting the big hit combination is displayed. A combination is determined (step S528). As an example, in the process of step S528, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a big hit determination symbol updated by a random counter or the like is extracted, and then a predetermined big hit determination symbol determination table stored in advance in a ROM or the like. , Etc. on the screen of the effect display device 9, the decorative symbols with the same symbol number that are stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R are displayed. To decide. At this time, depending on whether the jackpot type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”, and whether or not there is a promotion effect during the big hit, it may be determined that a different decorative symbol is determined as a final decorative symbol. Good.

  As a specific example, when the jackpot type is “non-probable variation”, any one of the multiple types of normal symbols is selected and determined as a definite decorative symbol constituting the non-probable variation jackpot combination. That's fine. When the jackpot type is “probable variation”, any one of a plurality of types of normal symbols or probability variation symbols is selected, and a definite ornament symbol that constitutes a non-probability variation jackpot combination or a probability variation jackpot combination. You just have to decide. At this time, when it is determined to be a definite decorative symbol of a non-probable variation big hit combination, the notification that it is controlled to the probable variation state is not performed in the re-drawing effect during variable display, and is executed corresponding to the big hit gaming state. What is necessary is just to alert | report that it is controlled to a probable change state by the promotion effect during a big hit. On the other hand, when it is determined to be a definite decorative combination of probability variation big hit combination, a notification that control is made to the probability variation state is performed in the re-lottery effect during variable display or without executing the re-lottery effect.

  After executing any of the processes of steps S524, S525, S527, and S528, a prefetch notice execution setting process is executed (step S535). FIG. 66 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the prefetch notice execution setting process. In the prefetching advance notice execution setting process shown in FIG. 66, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the prefetching notice execution flag is on (step S601). If the pre-reading notice execution flag is off (step S601; No), the prefetching notice execution setting process is terminated.

  If the pre-reading notice execution flag is on (step S601; Yes), the value of the prefetching notice execution number counter is decremented by 1 (step S602). Then, based on the value of the prefetching notice execution frequency counter and the prefetching notice effect control pattern set, settings for executing the prefetching notice effect are performed (step S603). In the process of step S603, it is only necessary to make settings for executing the pre-reading notice effect corresponding to the effect content shown in FIG. Further, in the case of the pre-reading notice effect control pattern for executing the stop symbol notice, a process for determining which chance eye shown in FIG. 62 is to be stopped may be executed. In this case, instead of the non-reach combination determined in step S524 of FIG. 64, control for stopping and displaying the chance eye A or chance eye B is executed. If it is a pre-reading notice effect control pattern for executing the background change notice, control for stopping and displaying the non-reach combination determined in step S524 in FIG. 64 is executed. In the case of the pre-reading notice effect control pattern for executing the stop symbol advance notice, the process for determining the chance eye A or the chance eye B to be stopped and displayed instead of the process for determining the non-reach combination in step S524 in FIG. May be executed. Also, before the step S524 in FIG. 64, the pre-reading notice execution setting process is executed, and when the chance to stop display is determined, the process in the step S524 in FIG. 64 may be skipped. Good. By doing in this way, the duplication of the process which determines a stop symbol can be avoided.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the value of the prefetching notice execution number counter is 0 (step S604). If the value of the prefetching notice execution number counter is not 0 (step S604; No), the prefetching notice execution setting process is terminated.

  If the value of the prefetching notice execution number counter is 0 (step S604; Yes), the prefetching notice execution flag is cleared to an off state (step S605). The case where the value of the pre-reading notice execution number counter is 0 is a case where the current change is a change that is a target of the pre-reading notice effect, and the pre-reading notice effect ends. Thereafter, the prefetch advance notice execution setting process is terminated.

  After the pre-reading notice execution setting process is executed in step S535, whether or not a changing notice effect is executed and a changing notice pattern corresponding to the effect state of the changing notice effect in the case of execution are determined (step S529). . As an example, in the process of step S529, a pre-change changing notice determination table prepared in advance is selected and set as a use table for determining the presence / absence of changing notice effect and the changing notice pattern. In the changing notice table, the variable display result notification command (display result specifying command) (display result specifying command) and the variable display result specified by the variable pattern specifying command (variation pattern command) are used. Accordingly, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value for determining the changing notice type is “no execution” corresponding to the case where the changing notice effect is not executed, or the changing notice effect is executed. It may be assigned to a plurality of changing notice patterns in the case. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 refers to the changing notice notice table based on numerical data indicating the changing random notice value extracted from a random counter or the like, for example, and the presence / absence of the changing notice effect is changed. What is necessary is just to determine a medium notice pattern.

  In the process of step S529, for example, the presence / absence of the changing notice effect and the changing notice pattern may be determined at a determination rate as shown in FIG. In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 65 (A), a change notice is made depending on whether the change pattern corresponds to “non-reach lose”, “reach lose”, “big hit”, or “small hit”. The presence / absence of the performance and the decision rate of the changing notice pattern are varied.

  Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern is “Leach Loss”, the rate at which the changing notice effect is executed (ratio determined other than “No Notice Execution”) is greater than the case of “Non-Leach Loss”. When the fluctuation pattern is “big hit”, the percentage of the announcement effect during fluctuation is higher than when it is “non-reach lose”, “reach lose”, and “small hit” . In each change notice pattern, the ratio that the variable display result is “big hit” is high in the order of “notice Z”, “notice Y”, and “notice X”. With such a setting, it is possible to notify or suggest that the variable display result is “big hit” or that the reach is executed by executing the changing notice effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a specific pre-reading notice effect is being executed, the presence / absence of the changing notice effect and the changing notice pattern are changed at a special determination rate as shown in FIG. Is to be decided. Specifically, in the case where the prefetching notice effect of the prefetching notice pattern SYP3-1 in which the background change notice is executed after the stop symbol notice is executed, before the background change notice is executed yet. In some cases, the presence / absence of the changing notice effect and the changing notice pattern are determined at a special determination ratio as shown in FIG. Note that, when the pre-reading notice effect is being executed, the variable display result until the change that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect is “non-reach lose”. Therefore, in FIG. 65B, the determination ratio in the case of “non-reach lose” Only shows. In the determination ratio of FIG. 65 (B), the ratio determined as “notice Y” is higher than the determination ratio in the case of “non-reach loss” in FIG. Is always determined as “notice Y”). With such a setting, when the pre-reading notice effect of the stop symbol notice is being executed, it is possible to indicate to the player that the background change notice will be executed according to the effect mode of the changing notice effect. Will improve.

  In this embodiment, when the “notice Z” changing notice effect is executed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the “notice Y” changing notice effect is executed. Therefore, the player may be discouraged when the notice effect during fluctuation of “notice Y” is normally executed. However, when the pre-reading notice effect of “preliminary notice Y” is executed when the pre-reading notice effect of the stop symbol notice is being executed, the ratio (pre-reading) of the pre-reading notice effect of the background change notice after that is executed. The ratio of the notice pattern SYP3-1) increases. The prefetching notice effect of the prefetching notice pattern SYP3-1 has the highest jackpot reliability among the prefetching notice effects. Therefore, when the prefetching notice effect of the stop symbol notice is being executed, the notice notice effect during the change of “notice Y” Even if is executed, the subsequent display result can be expected, the player's expectation can be maintained, and the interest of the game is improved.

  It should be noted that the effect mode of each changing notice pattern only needs to be different so that they can be distinguished from each other. For example, the notice X is a changing notice pattern for executing a changing notice effect for “character display”, and the notice Y is a changing notice pattern for executing a changing notice effect for “step-up operation”. Z is a changing notice pattern for executing the changing notice effect of “operation notice”.

  In the “character display” changing notice effect, an effect display in which a character image prepared in advance at a predetermined position is displayed, for example, on the display screen of the effect display device 9 during the variable display of the decorative design.

  In the “step-up operation” changing notice effect, an effect of switching and displaying a plurality of kinds of effect images prepared in advance in a predetermined order, for example, on the display screen of the effect display device 9 during the variable display of the decorative pattern. There may be an effect operation in which the effect mode changes (steps up) in a plurality of stages by the display. It should be noted that in the notice effect during fluctuation of the “step-up operation”, after any one of a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance (for example, an effect image displayed first in a predetermined order) is displayed, The effect display in the changing notice effect may be terminated without switching the effect image. In the “step-up operation” changing notice effect, the effect mode is changed in a plurality of stages by, for example, an effect operation in which the movable member is operated in a plurality of types according to a predetermined order during variable display of the decorative pattern ( An effect operation such as stepping up) may be performed. In the “step-up operation” changing notice effect, the effect operation in the notice effect is terminated without switching to the second-stage effect operation after the movable member performs the effect operation in one kind of operation mode. You may make it happen.

  In the “notice of operation change” notice effect during change, for example, the display of the effect image on the display screen of the effect display device 9 is changed in response to the operation button 120 being operated by the player during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In other words, the production operation is changed by changing the sound output from the speaker 27 or the like. As an example, in the changing notice of “operation notice”, a predetermined effect operation as an operation promotion effect is performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The operation promotion effect is obtained by, for example, displaying an effect image such as a character image or a message image prepared in advance at a predetermined position on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Any production operation that prompts the operation may be used.

  In this embodiment, the during-change notice effects of “character display”, “step-up operation”, and “operation notice” are executed at different timings from the start of change to the end of change. Specifically, the execution timing of “operation notice” is the earliest, and the execution timing of “character display” is the latest. Therefore, the big hit reliability differs depending on not only the effect mode of the changing notice effect but also the execution timing. Further, when the pre-reading notice effect for the stop symbol notice is being executed, it is possible to indicate to the player that the background change notice is executed according to the execution timing of the changing notice effect, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  After executing the process of step S529, the execution execution setting during other variable display is performed (step S530). As an example, in the process of step S530, setting for executing an effect different from the pre-reading notice effect and the changing notice effect may be performed. As such an effect, for example, a predetermined sound effect (for example, an alarm sound, a chime sound, a siren sound, etc.) is output from the speaker 27 at a predetermined timing at the start or during execution of variable display. Immediately announce that the variable display result will be a “big hit” by performing a certain aspect of the effect, such as the effect or the effect that the flash lamp included in the frame LED 28 shines, etc. An effect of a one-shot notification mode that (definitely notifies) may be executed. Alternatively, as such an effect, an effect of displaying a special effect image (premium image) corresponding to the variable display result being “big hit” may be executed.

  As another example, in the process of step S530, regardless of the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit”, for example, a setting may be made to execute a predetermined aspect for liveliness. More specifically, it is only necessary to be able to execute an effect of a predetermined mode such as an effect of a mode in which a predetermined lamp included in the frame LED 28 shines.

  Thereafter, the effect control pattern is determined as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S531). At this time, the effect control CPU 101 selects and uses one of the special-effects variation effect control patterns prepared in response to, for example, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command (variation pattern command). Set as a pattern. For example, when the setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect of the character display notice is made, the notice effect control pattern corresponding to the setting may be selected.

  After executing the process of step S531, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer is set corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command (variation pattern command) (step S532). Subsequently, the setting for starting the variation of the decorative design or the like in the effect display device 9 is performed (step S533). At this time, for example, by transmitting a display control command designated by the display control data included in the special-figure variation production control pattern determined as the use pattern in step S531 to the VDP 109 of the production control board 80, etc. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R provided on the screen of the effect display device 9. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S534), and the variable display start setting process ends.

Next, a specific example of control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game ball wins the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a or the second start opening switch 14a, the first start opening In the switch passing process (see step S312) and the second start port switch passing process (see step S314), the winning random number determination process is executed.

  In the winning random number determination process, whether or not it is a big hit, whether or not a big hit, the determination result of the jackpot type, and the range of the determination value range of the random value for determining the variation pattern type Based on the determination result, a symbol designation command and a variation category command are transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80.

  On the side of the production control board 80, for example, when the production control CPU 101 executes the prefetching notice determination process in step S161 in FIG. 59, or if the prefetching notice is not being restricted (step S704; No), the change up to the previous time If the category or the like is in a situation where the prefetching notice effect can be executed (step S709; Yes), the presence / absence of the prefetching notice effect, the prefetching notice pattern, etc. are determined in step S710 of FIG. Based on the determination result, the pre-reading notice effect is executed over a plurality of fluctuations.

  FIG. 67 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the effect display device 9 when the pre-reading notice effect of the stop symbol notice is executed. FIG. 67 (A) shows the effect display device 9 in which the decorative symbol variation is executed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. Here, based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13, the pre-reading notice determination process shown in FIG. 60 is executed, and in step S710, it is decided to execute the pre-reading notice pattern SYP1-2. Shall. Since the number of reserved memories is 3 due to the winning at this time, the prefetch notice effect control pattern SCP2-1 shown in FIG. 63 is set in the process of step S712.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (B), when the change at that time is finished, the pre-reading notice effect is started from the next change. In the first change in which the pre-reading notice effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 67 (C) and (D), for example, the chance eye CB1 (“1 · 2 · 3”) is stopped. Here, which chance B to stop is decided in step S603 in FIG.

  Then, in the second fluctuation after the prefetching notice effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 67 (E) and 67 (F), for example, the chance eye CB2 (“2.3.4”) is stopped.

  Subsequently, in the third change after the start of the prefetching notice effect (a change that is a target of the prefetching notice effect), a change corresponding to the determined change pattern is executed. Here, corresponding to the big hit variation pattern, as shown in FIGS. 67 (G) to (I), after the variation is started, reach is reached, and the decorative symbols constituting the big hit combination are stopped. .

  As described above, in the pre-reading notice effect of the stop symbol notice, it is possible to notify the possibility of a big hit or reach by stopping the predetermined chance eyes over a plurality of fluctuations. .

  FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a display operation example in the effect display device 9 when the pre-reading notice effect of the background change notice is executed. FIG. 68 (A) shows the effect display device 9 in which the decorative symbol variation is executed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. Here, based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13, the prefetch notice determination process shown in FIG. 60 is executed, and in step S 710, it is decided to execute the prefetch notice pattern SYP 2-1. Shall. Since the number of reserved memories is 3 due to the winning at this time, the prefetch notice effect control pattern SCP3-1 shown in FIG. 63 is set in the process of step S712.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), when the change at that time is finished, the pre-reading notice effect is started from the next change. In the first change in which the pre-reading notice effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 68C to 68E, for example, a character “chance” is displayed on the effect display device 9, and the background image in the effect display device 9 is displayed. The image changes from an image with the motif of the day (normal background image) to a background image with the motif of the night (special background image). Note that the stop symbol at this time is a decorative symbol constituting a non-reach lose combination.

  Then, in the second fluctuation after the start of the pre-reading notice effect, as shown in FIGS. 68 (F) and (G), the background image continues with the night as a motif.

  Subsequently, in the third change after the start of the prefetching notice effect (a change that is a target of the prefetching notice effect), a change corresponding to the determined change pattern is executed. Here, corresponding to the big hit variation pattern, as shown in FIGS. 68 (H) to (J), reach is made after the variation starts, and the decorative symbols constituting the big hit combination are stopped. . Even in the third variation, the background image continues to be a night motif.

  As described above, in the pre-reading notice effect of the background change notice, it becomes a special background image that is different from the usual over a plurality of fluctuations, so that the possibility of becoming a big hit or reach may be noticed. it can. Although the stop symbol during execution of the background change notice is described as a combination of non-reach loses, the chance may be stopped also in this case.

  FIG. 69 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the effect display device 9 when the pre-reading notice effect of the background change notice is executed after the stop symbol notice. FIG. 69 (A) shows the effect display device 9 in which the decorative symbol variation is executed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. Here, based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13, the pre-reading notice determination process shown in FIG. 60 is executed, and in step S710, it is decided to execute the pre-reading notice pattern SYP3-1. Shall. Since the number of reserved memories is 3 due to the winning at this time, the prefetch notice effect control pattern SCP4-1 shown in FIG. 63 is set in the process of step S712.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69 (B), when the change at that time is finished, the pre-reading notice effect is started from the next change. In the first change in which the pre-reading notice effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 69 (C) and 69 (D), for example, the chance eye CA1 (“1 · 1 · 2”) is stopped. Here, the chance eye A to be stopped is determined in step S603 in FIG.

  Then, in the second fluctuation after the pre-reading notice effect is started, for example, a letter “chance” is displayed on the effect display device 9 as shown in FIGS. 69 (E) to 69 (G). The background image changes from an image having a day motif (normal background image) to a background image having a night motif (special background image). Note that the stop symbol at this time is a decorative symbol constituting a non-reach lose combination.

  Subsequently, in the third change after the start of the prefetching notice effect (a change that is a target of the prefetching notice effect), a change corresponding to the determined change pattern is executed. Here, corresponding to the big hit variation pattern, as shown in FIGS. 69 (H) to 69 (J), reach is made after the fluctuation is started, and the decorative symbols constituting the big hit combination are stopped. . Even in the third variation, the background image continues to be a night motif.

  As described above, in the pre-reading notice effect in which the background change notice is executed after the stop symbol notice, the background change that changes to a special background image different from the normal after the stop sign notice that the chance eye A stops is executed. By executing the notice, it is possible to notify the possibility of a big hit or the possibility of reaching.

  In addition, when the stop symbol notice that the chance eye A stops is executed, and after that, the background change notice is not executed, the biggest hit reliability is the lowest among the prefetch notice effects, but the background change notice is executed. In such a case, the reliability of the big hit is the highest in the pre-reading notice effect. Thus, by providing the prefetching notice pattern that changes (shifts) from the production mode indicating that the reliability is low to the production mode that indicates that the reliability is high, the prefetching notice production of the pattern with low reliability is executed. Even in this case, the player's expectation can be maintained, and the interest of the game is improved.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, in the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61, as a prefetching notice effect pattern (prefetching notice pattern), a chance item predetermined in the effect display device 9 is displayed in the effect display device 9 over a plurality of variable displays. A pre-reading notice pattern SYP1-1 in which A stops, a pre-reading notice pattern SYP1-2 in which a chance eye B predetermined in the effect display device 9 stops in the effect display device 9 over a plurality of variable displays, and the display device 5 The background image changes from a normal background image to a special background image, and the pre-reading notice pattern SYP2-1 that becomes the special background image until the variable display to be noticed is executed and the effect display device 9 After the predetermined chance A on the display device 9 stops, the background image on the display device 5 changes from a normal background image to a special background image, and a notice is given. Until the variable display of interest is performed with the pre-read announcement pattern SYP3-1 serving as the special background image, it is provided. The pattern of the prefetching notice effect is not limited to these, and a pattern of the prefetching notice effect other than these may be provided. For example, as shown in FIG. 70, as a look-ahead notice pattern of a look-ahead notice effect executed over four fluctuations, the chance eye A stops at the first fluctuation and the chance eye B stops at the second fluctuation. The background image may be changed to a special background image in the third change, and the change may be continuously executed in the special background image in the fourth change. By providing such a pre-reading notice pattern, it is possible to produce an effect in which the jackpot reliability is stepped up step by step, allowing the player to pay attention to changes in the production mode, and improving the fun of the game To do.

  In the above embodiment, by determining the prefetching notice pattern, the presentation mode of the prefetching notice effect that is executed over a plurality of fluctuations is determined, but as a result, the same as in the above embodiment. As long as the control for executing the pre-reading notice effect is performed, the method of determining the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect is not limited to the method of the above embodiment.

  For example, in a plurality of fluctuations until a change targeted for the prefetching notice effect is executed, any prefetching notice effect of the effect form is executed based on the display result or the variation category of the change targeted for the prefetching notice effect. It may be determined for each change. Specifically, when the display result of the variation that is the target of the prefetching notice effect is “big hit”, it is only necessary that the prefetching notice effect in the production mode with higher jackpot reliability is easily executed. In this case, it is preferable to store the effect mode in the previous variation so that the pre-reading notice effect of the effect mode having a lower jackpot reliability than the effect mode of the previous variation is not executed. By doing in this way, it can prevent that an effect that a big hit reliability falls as a prefetch notice effect (continuous effect) progresses.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the pre-reading notice effect of the background change notice is executed, the timing of changing from the normal background image to the special background image is not particularly mentioned, but the fluctuation for executing the background change notice is not mentioned. The timing at which the normal background image is changed to the special background image may be changed at any timing.

  For example, the normal background image may be changed to a special background image either at the start of change or at the end of change in the change for executing the background change notice. In this case, for example, when it is determined in step S710 shown in FIG. 60 other than “no execution” corresponding to not executing the pre-reading notice effect (step S711; No), as shown in FIG. It is determined whether the pre-reading notice pattern is SYP3-1 corresponding to the background change notice being executed after the stop symbol notice (step S751). If the prefetch notice pattern is other than SYP3-1 (step S751; No), the process proceeds to step S712.

  If the pre-reading notice pattern is SYP3-1 (step S751; Yes), it is determined whether the change timing of the background image in the background change notice is at the start of change or at the end of change (step S752). By adopting the start of change or the end of change as the change timing of the background image, the difference in change timing becomes clear to the player, and an effect that is easy to understand for the player can be executed.

  In the process of step S752, the change timing is determined at a different rate depending on whether the variation category to be subjected to the pre-reading notice effect is “non-reach lose”, “reach lose”, “accuracy / small hit”, or “big hit” To do. For example, in the process of step S752, the change timing may be determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG.

  In the determination ratio shown in FIG. 71 (B), the change timing is easily determined at the end of the change regardless of the change category. When the background image does not change at the start of the change, the player expects the background image to change at the end of the change, so that the player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

  In the determination ratio shown in FIG. 71B, when the variation category is “big hit”, it is easily determined at the end of the variation. With such a setting, it is possible to make the jackpot reliability when the timing at which the background image changes in the background change notice is at the end of the fluctuation higher than the jackpot reliability when it is at the start of the fluctuation. Note that by increasing the jackpot reliability when the background image changes at the end of the change, if the background image does not change at the start of the change, the player changes the background image at the end of the change. As a result, it is expected that the jackpot reliability will be high, so that the player's expectation can be further enhanced.

  Note that, contrary to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 71 (B), the change timing may be easily determined at the start of the change regardless of the change category, or when the change category is “big hit”, You may make it easy to determine at the time of a fluctuation | variation start. By doing so, it is possible to notify the player of the big hit reliability and the like at an early stage, and it is possible to pay attention to the start of fluctuation.

  In FIG. 71A, the change timing of the background image in the background change notice is determined only when the prefetch notice pattern is SYP3-1. However, when the prefetch notice pattern is SYP2-1. In addition, the change timing of the background image may be determined.

  After determining the change timing of the background image in step S752, the process proceeds to step S712. In this modification, a pattern as shown in FIG. 72 is provided as a prefetch notice effect control pattern of the prefetch notice pattern SYP3-1 according to the change timing. Then, in the process of step S712, according to the determination result in step S752, the pre-reading notice effect control pattern SCP4-1-1 (when the change timing starts to change with the number of reserved memories 3), SCP4-1-2 (the number of reserved memories). 3 when the change timing ends at the end of change), SCP4-2-1 (when the change timing starts when the number of pending storages is 4), or SCP4-2-2 (when the change timing ends when the change ends when the number of held memories is 4) Should be set.

  FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of a display operation in the effect display device 9 when the pre-reading notice effect of the background change notice is executed after the stop symbol notice, and the change timing of the background change notice is the start of change. It is. FIG. 73 (A) shows the effect display device 9 in which the decorative symbol variation is executed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. Here, based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13, the pre-reading notice determination process shown in FIG. 60 is executed, and in step S710, it is decided to execute the pre-reading notice pattern SYP3-1. In step S752, it is assumed that the change timing is determined at the start of change. Since the number of reserved memories is 3 due to the winning at this time, the prefetch notice effect control pattern SCP4-1-1 shown in FIG. 72 is set in the process of step S712.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), when the change at that time is finished, the pre-reading notice effect is started from the next change. In the first change in which the pre-reading notice effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 73C and 73D, for example, the chance eye CA1 (“1 · 1 · 2”) is stopped. Here, the chance eye A to be stopped is determined in step S603 in FIG.

  Then, in the second fluctuation after the start of the pre-reading notice effect, as shown in FIG. 73 (E), the background image in the effect display device 9 at the start of the fluctuation is from an image having a noon motif (normal background image). Changes to a background image (special background image) with a night motif. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 73 (F), the decorative symbols constituting the non-reach lose combination are stopped. Note that the chance eye A may be stopped in FIG.

  Subsequently, in the third change after the start of the prefetching notice effect (a change that is a target of the prefetching notice effect), a change corresponding to the determined change pattern is executed. Here, corresponding to the big hit variation pattern, as shown in FIGS. 73 (G) to 73 (I), reach is made after the fluctuation is started, and the decorative symbols constituting the big hit combination are stopped. . Even in the third variation, the background image continues to be a night motif.

  FIG. 74 is a diagram showing an example of a display operation in the effect display device 9 when the pre-reading notice effect of the background change notice is executed after the stop symbol notice and the change timing of the background change notice is the start of change. It is. FIG. 74 (A) shows the effect display device 9 in which the decorative symbol variation is executed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. Here, based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13, the prefetching notice determination process shown in FIG. 60 is executed, and in step S710, it is decided to execute the prefetching notice pattern SYP3-1. In step S752, it is assumed that the change timing is determined at the end of the change. Since the number of reserved memories is 3 due to the winning at this time, the prefetch notice effect control pattern SCP4-2-1 shown in FIG. 72 is set in the process of step S712.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 74 (B), when the change at that time is finished, the pre-reading notice effect is started from the next change. In the first change in which the pre-reading notice effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 74 (C) and 74 (D), for example, the chance eye CA1 (“1 · 1 · 2”) is stopped. Here, the chance eye A to be stopped is determined in step S603 in FIG.

  Then, in the second variation after the pre-reading notice effect is started, as shown in FIG. 74 (E), after the variation of the decorative symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 74 (F), the non-reach loss combination is changed. When the decorative pattern to be configured stops (at the end of the change), the background image in the effect display device 9 changes from an image having a noon motif (ordinary background image) to a background image having a night motif (special background image). Change. In FIG. 74 (F), the chance eyes may be stopped.

  Subsequently, in the third change after the start of the prefetching notice effect (a change that is a target of the prefetching notice effect), a change corresponding to the determined change pattern is executed. Here, corresponding to the big hit variation pattern, as shown in FIGS. 74 (G) to 74 (I), after the variation starts, the reach is reached and the decorative symbols constituting the big hit combination are stopped. . Even in the third variation, the background image continues to be a night motif.

  As shown in FIG. 74, the big hit reliability is higher when the background changes at the end of the fluctuation than when the background changes at the start of the fluctuation as shown in FIG. By increasing the jackpot reliability when the background image changes at the end of the change, if the background image does not change at the start of the change, the player changes the background image at the end of the change, Since it is expected that the jackpot reliability will be high, it is possible to further increase the player's expectation.

  FIG. 75 is a diagram illustrating an example of a symbol feed effect. In the present embodiment, as one of the effects, there is a case where the symbol feed effect is executed after the reach state is reached (after the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped). The symbol feed effect is one or a plurality of symbols (identification information, middle symbols) that are still changing after reaching the reach state according to a predetermined symbol arrangement on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Display and send (for example, scroll and send from the top of the screen to the bottom of the screen (middle symbols are scrolled at a constant speed)). In addition, the symbol feed effect may be performed, for example, as a frame feed that stops after the intermediate symbol performs an intermittent operation of repeating scrolling and pause operation after reaching the reach state. A symbol sent in this way by a symbol feeding effect is called a sending symbol. In the symbol feeding effect, the big hit expectation degree is suggested by performing the effect that the number of effect symbols that are sent one by one during variable display is basically plural.

  Next, the symbol arrangement of effect symbols will be described. A ROM (not shown) provided on the effect control board 80 stores a plurality of types of effect symbols used for effects that variably display the effect symbols. Each design symbol is assigned a symbol number corresponding to each. As an example, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbols are each composed of a plurality of numbers of symbols indicating “1” to “9”. The symbol array numbers “1” to “9” are assigned to the symbols “1” to “9”, respectively. While the “Left”, “Middle”, and “Right” effect symbols are changing, the “Left”, “Middle”, and “Right” effect symbols are among “Left”, “Middle”, and “Right”. In the symbol display area, for example, a scrolling display that flows from the top to the bottom in order from the smallest symbol array number to the largest is performed (the scroll may be scrolled from the right side to the left side). Then, when an effect symbol whose symbol array number is the maximum value (for example, “9”) is displayed, an effect symbol whose symbol number is the minimum value (for example, “1”) is subsequently displayed. The production symbols indicating "" to "9" are displayed in a cyclic manner by scrolling.

  In the production control microcomputer 100, the design symbols of the designated type are stopped and displayed by designating the above-described symbol arrangement number when various production displays such as the reach production are performed. You can control. Further, in the symbol feeding effect, an effect of increasing the number of symbols from a plurality of symbols of the reach symbols among the sending symbols is performed. Such a symbol feed effect is executed when a specific reach variation pattern, which is a variation pattern in which an effect by a specific reach is performed, is determined in the variation pattern setting process (S301) in the special symbol process of FIG. Here, the specific reach is a reach included in a long reach with a long variation time compared to a normal reach with a short variation time during the reach.

  The symbol feed effect will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 75 (A), after the variable display is started in each of the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 9, The reach state is formed by stopping the effect symbol indicating “7” in the left symbol display area 9L and the right symbol display area 9R. In the reach state, the middle symbol display area 9C has a low speed (for example, a player who has been decelerated more than before the reach state occurs) as shown in FIGS. 75 (B) to (F). The symbol is sent by scrolling at a low speed at which the symbol can be visually recognized (that is, the middle symbol is still changing). A combination of symbols forming such a reach state is called a reach symbol.

  Here, in this example, according to the symbol arrangement order, before reaching the “5” symbol two symbols before the reach symbol “7”, one effect symbol is shown as shown in FIGS. 75 (B) and 75 (C). 76, (D) and (E) for the “5” symbol two symbols before the reach symbol “7” and the “6” symbol one symbol before the reach symbol “7”. A control example is shown in which two are sent two by two.

  Specifically, in the reach state, as shown in FIG. 75B, the “7” symbol, which is the reach symbol, is reduced and displayed behind the “left” and “right” display areas 9L and 9R. In the middle symbol display area 9C, one “3” symbol which is a symbol other than the reach symbol is displayed from the top to the bottom. Further, as shown in FIG. 75 (C), a display in which one “4” symbol which is the next number of the “3” symbol is sent from top to bottom is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75 (D), in the middle symbol display area 9C, a display in which two “5” symbols that are two symbols before the reach symbol are sent (hereinafter also referred to as “two-feed display”) is performed. . Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (E), a display in which two “6” symbols, one symbol before the reach symbol, are sent. Then, when a big hit is made, as shown in FIG. 75 (F), the “7” symbol, which is the reach symbol, finally stops in the middle symbol display area 9C. In addition, after FIG. 75 (F), the “7” symbol that has been reduced and displayed behind the “left” and “right” display areas 9L and 9R of the effect display device 9 is displayed in the middle symbol display area 9C. If the symbol is finally stopped after it has the same size as the “7” symbol, the player can easily recognize that the big hit symbol is complete.

  If such a symbol feed effect is performed, a “5” symbol or a “6” symbol (non-reach identification information) other than the “7” symbol (identification symbol forming the reach state) that forms the reach state in the reach state. As shown in FIG. 76, which will be described later, the effect mode (the number of symbols to be displayed in this example) to be executed differs depending on the expected degree of jackpot. Thus, when the “5” symbol and “6” symbol (non-reach identification information) other than the reach symbol are variably displayed, the player's attention can be drawn.

  FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a symbol feed effect selection table. FIG. 76A shows a symbol-feeding effect selection table at the time of big hit determination, and FIG. 76B shows a symbol-feeding effect selection table at the time of losing determination. These symbol feed effect selection tables are stored in a ROM (not shown) provided on the effect control board 80. Further, the random number value for determining symbol advance used in each table is updated in the random number update process (step S7007) in the effect control main process shown in FIG.

  When the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the specific reach variation pattern, in the variable display start setting process of step S171 in the effect control process shown in FIG. decide. Specifically, in the changing notice effect determination process in step S529 in FIG. 64, the effect pattern corresponding to the extracted value is selected by extracting a random value using the symbol feed effect selection table in FIG. In the symbol feed effect selection table, according to the variable display result identified from the variable display result notification command (display result designation command), the variation pattern identified from the variation pattern designation command (variation pattern command), etc. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value for determination is assigned according to each symbol feed effect pattern. By using such a symbol feed effect selection table, the presence / absence of the symbol feed effect and the symbol feed effect pattern are determined.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (A), when the display result is a big hit, the big hit determination time symbol design effect selection table is selected. In FIG. 76 (A), random numbers 1 to 10 are assigned to the pattern without the design feed effect as the design feed random numbers (1 to 100), and the two-feed display pattern from the front of the reach design is displayed. Random values of 11 to 30 are allocated, random numbers of 31 to 60 are allocated to the two-feed display pattern from the front of the two symbols of the reach symbol, and 61 to the two-feed display pattern of the three symbols of the reach symbol are displayed. 100 random values are allocated.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 76 (B), when the display result is out of reach (reach lose), the design determination effect selection table at the time of outset determination is selected. In FIG. 76 (B), random numbers 1 to 40 are assigned to the pattern without the design feed effect as the design feed random numbers (1 to 100), and the pattern of the 2-feed display from the front of the reach design is displayed. Random numbers 41 to 70 are assigned, random numbers 71 to 90 are assigned to the two-feed display pattern from the front of the two symbols of the reach symbol, and 91 to the two-feed display pattern of the three symbols from the front of the reach symbol. 100 random values are allocated.

  In this way, when winning a big hit, the ratio of selecting a pattern without a design advance effect is smaller than when losing, and further, the ratio of selecting a two-feed display from the front of a plurality of symbols in a reach design. It is set to be high. Therefore, the player can expect that the display result will be a big hit by executing the two-feed display from a plurality of symbols before the reach symbol. In addition, when a big hit is made, an effect symbol for which two-feed display is started is set so that an effect symbol farther away from the reach symbol (for example, three symbols before, etc.) can be selected more easily than when it is lost. ing. Therefore, the player has a sense of expectation for the big hit based on how far the two-feed display is performed from the symbol before the reach symbol.

  Further, according to such a configuration, when a non-reach effect symbol (non-reach symbol) other than the effect symbol (reach symbol) that forms the reach state in the reach state is variably displayed, according to the big hit expectation degree Since the effect mode of the symbol sending effect to be executed is different, the player's attention can be drawn when the non-reach effect symbol is variably displayed.

Next, modifications, feature points, and the like of the embodiment described above are listed below.
(1) In the above embodiment, the change is started in order to notify the effect control microcomputer 100 of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, and the presence or absence of the pseudo-ream. Although an example in which one variation pattern command is sometimes transmitted is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the production control microcomputer 100 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the first command to indicate whether there is a pseudo-ream, a slip effect, etc. before reaching (so-called if not reach). A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop) is transmitted, and the second command has reached the reach such as the type of reach and presence / absence of re-lottery effect (if the reach is not reach, so-called first) You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect (after 2 stop). In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform effect control in variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 notifies the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the specific change mode executed at each timing. It may be. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  (2) In the above-described embodiment, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. A circuit to be mounted may be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  (3) In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the game control microcomputer 560 is not connected to another board (for example, 3, a sound / lamp board having a function of a circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and a function of a circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35 and a function of a circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35. ) May be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to sound control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above-described embodiment. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  (4) In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of a gaming machine. However, according to the present invention, a predetermined number of wagers are set when a medal is inserted, and the player operates the operating lever. A slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player when a combination of stop symbols becomes a specific symbol combination when a plurality of types of symbols are rotated and the symbols are stopped according to the stop button operation by the player. It is also possible to apply to.

  (5) In the above-described embodiment, the game machine uses a game medium as an example, but the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media. The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that encloses a game medium such as a game ball and gives a score when a prize granting condition is satisfied.

  (6) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75 and FIG. 76, when the effect symbol is sent as the symbol sending effect, the symbols to be sent are displayed in a plurality (non-reach). In the case where the symbols increase), the number of symbols sent as a symbol feed effect may be increased and sound effects may be generated. Specifically, the sound output board 70 and the speaker 27 functioning as a sound generator may be used to generate sound effects at the timing when the increased symbols are displayed. As a sound effect, a special sound executed with a high fluctuation of a normal sound effect sound (for example, a sound effect of “Sub”), an expectation for a big hit, or an expectation for probability change (may be an expectation for both). A simple sound effect (for example, a sound effect “pui” flows) may be output. Furthermore, as the sound effect, a sound in which a human voice flows (a sound that “surely develops” flows) may be used, or a song or music may be played. In addition, one or both of the effect of increasing the number of symbols and the effect of flowing sound effects may change depending on the degree of expectation for the big hit or the degree of expectation for the probability change (for example, when the degree of expectation is low) Either one is executed when both are high). In this way, when a non-reach symbol other than the reach symbol forming the reach state is variably displayed in the reach state, the number of non-reach symbols can be increased and a sound effect can be generated by the sound generator. Because it is possible, the interest of the game is improved. When the effect further develops from the symbol feed effect, a change pattern having a long effect time in which the super reach is executed after the long reach is generated from the game control microcomputer 560 as the change pattern. It is also possible to perform an effect of developing from long reach to super reach. And when developing from long reach to super reach, it is only necessary to make a decision to execute the symbol feed effect shown in the present embodiment as an effect at the time of long reach.

  (7) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, when a specific reach variation pattern is received, an effect pattern without a symbol feed effect is selected at a certain rate. When the specific reach variation pattern is received, the symbol feeding effect may be executed.

  (8) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75 and FIG. 76, the case where two feed symbols are displayed as a symbol feed effect is shown. You may make it selectable from either. When determining the big hit, a pattern having a large number of symbols to be sent may be easily selected. Note that the number of symbols to be sent may be increased to more than four. Further, the degree of expectation for the big hit and the degree of expectation for the probability change may be set so that the degree of expectation becomes the highest when the number of symbols to be sent becomes the same as the number of reach symbols, for example.

  (9) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75 and FIG. 76, the case where two sending symbols are displayed as a symbol feeding effect is shown, but the number of sending symbols approaches the reach symbol. You may make it increase as it increases. Specifically, when the reach symbol is “7” symbol, as “4” symbol is two, “5” symbol is three, “6” symbol is four, etc. The number of symbols may be increased.

  (10) Also, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, when two symbols are fed and displayed as a symbol feeding effect, other than the reach symbol in the middle symbol display area 9C of the effect display device 9 Although the case where two symbols are displayed (a display in which two symbols are arranged horizontally) is shown, two symbols may be arranged vertically. Furthermore, after one “6” symbol is displayed and the symbol is sent, another “6” symbol is displayed again, so that a total of two non-reach symbols may be sent. . In this way, at first glance, since only one symbol is sent, it is determined that the reach is normal. However, since the same symbol is sent thereafter, it can be recognized as a special reach.

  (11) Also, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75, the case where a symbol “6” symbol or the like is sent and displayed as a symbol sent in the symbol feed effect is shown. May be other than numeric symbols. Specifically, a character, a symbol, or the like may be sent and displayed as a symbol feed effect together with or without a numeric symbol.

  (12) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75 and FIG. 76, the case where the feed symbol is increased as the symbol feed effect is shown. May be changed. For example, when the degree of expectation is high, the design is gold, and when the degree of expectation is low, a normal color may be used.

  (13) Further, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, the symbol feed effect is based on the number of symbols to be sent, and the number of symbols to be increased, according to the symbol feed effect selection table. The number and the number of symbols to be sent may be determined randomly (for example, when the reach symbol is “7”, the symbol to be changed (“5” symbol or “6”) is determined. Randomly determine the number of symbols to increase and what to do.

  (14) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75 and FIG. 76, an example is shown in which the symbols are changed from a plurality of symbols before the reach symbol. “6” symbols) may be one, and when a big hit is determined, symbols close to reach symbols may be selected at a high rate. For example, when the reach symbol is a “7” symbol, the “6” symbol may be easily selected as a symbol for changing the number of symbols when the big hit is determined. In the control example in this case, since there is only one target of the sending symbol to be changed, when a plurality of “5” symbols are displayed, one “6” symbol is sent and displayed.

  (15) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75, the case where the number of symbols other than the reach symbol increases depending on the degree of expectation for the big hit is shown, but when the expectation degree for the big hit is high, the reach symbol is shown. It is also possible to increase the size of the symbols other than and reduce the size of symbols other than the reach symbol when the expectation level for the big hit is low.

  (16) Further, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 75 and 76, when the sending symbol is increased as the symbol feeding effect, a case where a symbol having a plurality of symbols is fed and displayed is shown. However, the display may be changed when the feed is displayed. Specifically, the number of “6” symbols may be increased after an effect of cutting the “6” symbol or an effect of blasting when the “6” symbol is being displayed.

  (17) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75, a plurality of non-reach symbols are displayed in the middle symbol display area 9C that has not yet stopped with respect to fluctuations in the symbol feed effect. However, the non-reach symbol may be displayed only once or may be displayed a plurality of times. Specifically, when the “7” symbol is reached, two “6” symbols are displayed for the first time in the middle symbol display area 9C during the change, and then the screen is further scrolled. The player may recognize the second, third, and two “6” symbols a plurality of times. In that case, when the display result is a big hit, the number of scrolls may be increased as compared with the case where the display result is out of order.

  (18) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the case where the reliability of the jackpot is increased when the background changes is shown, but the case where the reliability of the jackpot is high also during the design feed effect. An effect of changing the background may be executed.

  (19) Note that any one of the above-described symbol feed effects may be executed, or any two or more may be executed in combination. Thus, the interest of the game is further improved by combining a plurality of effects.

  (20) It should be understood that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  The present invention is preferably applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine capable of performing a predetermined game.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine, 8a 1st special symbol display, 8b 2nd special symbol display, 9 production | presentation display device, 13 1st start winning opening, 14 2nd starting winning opening, 20 special variable winning ball apparatus, 31 game control Board (main board), 56 CPU, 502 clock circuit, 506 reset / interrupt controller, 506a IAT circuit, 506b watchdog timer (WDT), 507 free-run counter circuit, 508a 8-bit random number circuit, 508b 16-bit random number circuit, 525a , 525b Random number generation circuit, 537 update monitoring circuit, 560 game control microcomputer, 80 effect control board, 100 effect control microcomputer, 101 effect control CPU, 109 VDP.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that displays a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them and controls them to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the display result is a specific display result,
Pre-decision means for determining whether the display result is the specific display result before the display result is derived and displayed;
Fluctuation display control means for deriving and displaying a display result according to the determination of the prior determination means
Rendering means for performing variable display of non-reach identification information other than the identification information forming the reach state in the reach state ;
On-hold storage means capable of storing information on variable display as on-hold storage information;
A notice effect execution means for executing continuous notice effects over a variable display of the identification information a plurality of times before the change display based on the hold storage information stored in the hold storage means is executed ,
The effect means can execute an effect in which the non-reach identification information changes,
Aspects of the non reach identification information in accordance with the expected degree Ri Do different,
The notice effect executing means executes a pattern for executing the first notice effect and a second notice effect having a higher ratio of the specific display result than the first notice effect in the variable display of the identification information for a plurality of times. The notice effect can be executed in any one of a pattern and a pattern in which the second notice effect is executed after the first notice effect is executed,
There are a plurality of production modes of the first notice production,
In the case where the effect mode of the first notice effect is the first effect mode, the first notice effect is performed after the first notice effect is performed, compared to the case where the first effect effect is higher than the first effect mode. A gaming machine in which the ratio of executing the notice effect is high due to the pattern of executing the second notice effect .

Images